Add SORT_NONE and don't sort sort .init/.fini sections
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
5 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @syncodeindex ky cp
7 @c man begin INCLUDE
8 @include configdoc.texi
9 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
10 @include bfdver.texi
11 @c man end
12
13 @c @smallbook
14
15 @macro gcctabopt{body}
16 @code{\body\}
17 @end macro
18
19 @c man begin NAME
20 @ifset man
21 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
22 @set UsesEnvVars
23 @set GENERIC
24 @set ARM
25 @set C6X
26 @set H8300
27 @set HPPA
28 @set I960
29 @set M68HC11
30 @set M68K
31 @set MMIX
32 @set MSP430
33 @set POWERPC
34 @set POWERPC64
35 @set Renesas
36 @set SPU
37 @set TICOFF
38 @set WIN32
39 @set XTENSA
40 @end ifset
41 @c man end
42
43 @ifnottex
44 @dircategory Software development
45 @direntry
46 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
47 @end direntry
48 @end ifnottex
49
50 @copying
51 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54 @end ifset
55 version @value{VERSION}.
56
57 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
58 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
96 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97 Software Foundation, Inc.
98
99 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
100 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
101 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
104 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
105 @c man end
106
107 @end titlepage
108 @end iftex
109 @contents
110 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
112 @ifnottex
113 @node Top
114 @top LD
115 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118 @end ifset
119 version @value{VERSION}.
120
121 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
122 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
124
125 @menu
126 * Overview:: Overview
127 * Invocation:: Invocation
128 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129 @ifset GENERIC
130 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131 @end ifset
132 @ifclear GENERIC
133 @ifset H8300
134 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135 @end ifset
136 @ifset Renesas
137 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
138 @end ifset
139 @ifset I960
140 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141 @end ifset
142 @ifset ARM
143 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144 @end ifset
145 @ifset HPPA
146 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147 @end ifset
148 @ifset M68HC11
149 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150 @end ifset
151 @ifset M68K
152 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153 @end ifset
154 @ifset POWERPC
155 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156 @end ifset
157 @ifset POWERPC64
158 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159 @end ifset
160 @ifset SPU
161 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162 @end ifset
163 @ifset TICOFF
164 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165 @end ifset
166 @ifset WIN32
167 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168 @end ifset
169 @ifset XTENSA
170 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171 @end ifset
172 @end ifclear
173 @ifclear SingleFormat
174 * BFD:: BFD
175 @end ifclear
176 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
180 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
181 * LD Index:: LD Index
182 @end menu
183 @end ifnottex
184
185 @node Overview
186 @chapter Overview
187
188 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189 @cindex what is this?
190
191 @ifset man
192 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
193 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
194 @c man end
195
196 @c man begin SEEALSO
197 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199 @file{ld}.
200 @c man end
201 @end ifset
202
203 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
205 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
206 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
207 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
208
209 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
210 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
213 @ifset man
214 @c For the man only
215 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
216 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
218 @end ifset
219
220 @ifclear SingleFormat
221 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
223 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226 @end ifclear
227
228 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
231 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
232 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
234 @c man end
235
236 @node Invocation
237 @chapter Invocation
238
239 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
241 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
242 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243 you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
245 @c man end
246
247 @ifset UsesEnvVars
248 @menu
249 * Options:: Command Line Options
250 * Environment:: Environment Variables
251 @end menu
252
253 @node Options
254 @section Command Line Options
255 @end ifset
256
257 @cindex command line
258 @cindex options
259
260 @c man begin OPTIONS
261
262 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264 @cindex standard Unix system
265 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
266 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267 link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269 @smallexample
270 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271 @end smallexample
272
273 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
274 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
278 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
279 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
284 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286 noted in the descriptions below.
287
288 @cindex object files
289 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292 an option and its argument.
293
294 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298 message @samp{No input files}.
299
300 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
301 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
306 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
311
312 For options whose names are a single letter,
313 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315 option that requires them.
316
317 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
318 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
319 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
320 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
321 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
322 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324 output.
325
326 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331 accepted.
332
333 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
335 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336 compiler driver) like this:
337
338 @smallexample
339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
340 @end smallexample
341
342 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
343 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350 @smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352 @end smallexample
353
354 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355 linker:
356
357 @table @gcctabopt
358 @include at-file.texi
359
360 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
361 @item -a @var{keyword}
362 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
368 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377 interface.
378
379 @ifset I960
380 @cindex architectures
381 @kindex -A @var{arch}
382 @item -A @var{architecture}
383 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
385 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
387 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
389 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
390 family}, for details.
391
392 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
393 other architecture families.
394 @end ifset
395
396 @ifclear SingleFormat
397 @cindex binary input format
398 @kindex -b @var{format}
399 @kindex --format=@var{format}
400 @cindex input format
401 @cindex input format
402 @item -b @var{input-format}
403 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
404 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
406 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
407 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
408 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
409 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
410 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414 @xref{BFD}.
415
416 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418 linking object files of different formats), by including
419 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
420 particular format.
421
422 The default format is taken from the environment variable
423 @code{GNUTARGET}.
424 @ifset UsesEnvVars
425 @xref{Environment}.
426 @end ifset
427 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
428 @code{TARGET};
429 @ifclear man
430 see @ref{Format Commands}.
431 @end ifclear
432 @end ifclear
433
434 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @cindex compatibility, MRI
437 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
439 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
440 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
441 @ifclear man
442 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443 @end ifclear
444 @ifset man
445 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446 @end ifset
447 Introduce MRI script files with
448 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
449 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
451 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453 @cindex common allocation
454 @kindex -d
455 @kindex -dc
456 @kindex -dp
457 @item -d
458 @itemx -dc
459 @itemx -dp
460 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
466 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
477 @cindex entry point, from command line
478 @kindex -e @var{entry}
479 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
480 @item -e @var{entry}
481 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
490 @kindex --exclude-libs
491 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
493 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
494 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499 be treated as hidden.
500
501 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512 regardless of this option.
513
514 @cindex dynamic symbol table
515 @kindex -E
516 @kindex --export-dynamic
517 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
518 @item -E
519 @itemx --export-dynamic
520 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
521 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
530
531 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534 linking the program itself.
535
536 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
537 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
538 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
539
540 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
544 @ifclear SingleFormat
545 @cindex big-endian objects
546 @cindex endianness
547 @kindex -EB
548 @item -EB
549 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551 @cindex little-endian objects
552 @kindex -EL
553 @item -EL
554 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555 @end ifclear
556
557 @kindex -f @var{name}
558 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559 @item -f @var{name}
560 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
561 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574 machine specific performance.
575
576 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
579 @kindex -F @var{name}
580 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
581 @item -F @var{name}
582 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
583 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594 @var{name}.
595
596 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
597 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
598 object files.
599 @ifclear SingleFormat
600 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
601 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
602 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
603 environment variable.
604 @end ifclear
605 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606 creating an ELF shared object.
607
608 @cindex finalization function
609 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
610 @item -fini=@var{name}
611 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614 the function to call.
615
616 @kindex -g
617 @item -g
618 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
620 @kindex -G @var{value}
621 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
622 @cindex object size
623 @item -G @var{value}
624 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627 MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630 @cindex runtime library name
631 @kindex -h @var{name}
632 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
633 @item -h @var{name}
634 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
635 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641 @kindex -i
642 @cindex incremental link
643 @item -i
644 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
646 @cindex initialization function
647 @kindex -init=@var{name}
648 @item -init=@var{name}
649 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652 function to call.
653
654 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
655 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
656 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
657 @item -l @var{namespec}
658 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
662 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
663 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
664
665 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
666 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672 @var{filename}.
673
674 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
681 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
682 archives multiple times.
683
684 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686 @ifset GENERIC
687 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
688 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
689 behaviour of the AIX linker.
690 @end ifset
691
692 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
693 @kindex -L @var{dir}
694 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
695 @item -L @var{searchdir}
696 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
697 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
699 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
702 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
703 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705 option is specified.
706
707 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
710 @ifset UsesEnvVars
711 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
712 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
713 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714 @end ifset
715
716 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720 @cindex emulation
721 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
722 @item -m @var{emulation}
723 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730 configured.
731
732 @cindex link map
733 @kindex -M
734 @kindex --print-map
735 @item -M
736 @itemx --print-map
737 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738 information about the link, including the following:
739
740 @itemize @bullet
741 @item
742 Where object files are mapped into memory.
743 @item
744 How common symbols are allocated.
745 @item
746 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
748 @item
749 The values assigned to symbols.
750
751 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757 linker script containing:
758
759 @smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763 @end smallexample
764
765 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766 option is used:
767
768 @smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772 @end smallexample
773
774 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775 scripts.
776 @end itemize
777
778 @kindex -n
779 @cindex read-only text
780 @cindex NMAGIC
781 @kindex --nmagic
782 @item -n
783 @itemx --nmagic
784 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
787
788 @kindex -N
789 @kindex --omagic
790 @cindex read/write from cmd line
791 @cindex OMAGIC
792 @item -N
793 @itemx --omagic
794 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
795 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
797 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799 specification published by Microsoft.
800
801 @kindex --no-omagic
802 @cindex OMAGIC
803 @item --no-omagic
804 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
808
809 @kindex -o @var{output}
810 @kindex --output=@var{output}
811 @cindex naming the output file
812 @item -o @var{output}
813 @itemx --output=@var{output}
814 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
815 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818 @kindex -O @var{level}
819 @cindex generating optimized output
820 @item -O @var{level}
821 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
822 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
823 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
828
829 @kindex -q
830 @kindex --emit-relocs
831 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
832 @item -q
833 @itemx --emit-relocs
834 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
835 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837 in larger executables.
838
839 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
841 @kindex --force-dynamic
842 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843 @item --force-dynamic
844 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845 to VxWorks targets.
846
847 @cindex partial link
848 @cindex relocatable output
849 @kindex -r
850 @kindex --relocatable
851 @item -r
852 @itemx --relocatable
853 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
854 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
855 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857 @code{OMAGIC}.
858 @c ; see @option{-N}.
859 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
863 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867 with input files in other formats at all.
868
869 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871 @kindex -R @var{file}
872 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873 @cindex symbol-only input
874 @item -R @var{filename}
875 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879 programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
881 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
882 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
883 the @option{-rpath} option.
884
885 @kindex -s
886 @kindex --strip-all
887 @cindex strip all symbols
888 @item -s
889 @itemx --strip-all
890 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892 @kindex -S
893 @kindex --strip-debug
894 @cindex strip debugger symbols
895 @item -S
896 @itemx --strip-debug
897 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899 @kindex -t
900 @kindex --trace
901 @cindex input files, displaying
902 @item -t
903 @itemx --trace
904 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
905
906 @kindex -T @var{script}
907 @kindex --script=@var{script}
908 @cindex script files
909 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
910 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
912 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
913 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
914 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917 options accumulate.
918
919 @kindex -dT @var{script}
920 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921 @cindex script files
922 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933 @samp{gcc}).
934
935 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
936 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937 @cindex undefined symbol
938 @item -u @var{symbol}
939 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946 @kindex -Ur
947 @cindex constructors
948 @item -Ur
949 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
951 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
952 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956 @samp{-r} for the others.
957
958 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966 in a linker script.
967
968 @kindex -v
969 @kindex -V
970 @kindex --version
971 @cindex version
972 @item -v
973 @itemx --version
974 @itemx -V
975 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
976 lists the supported emulations.
977
978 @kindex -x
979 @kindex --discard-all
980 @cindex deleting local symbols
981 @item -x
982 @itemx --discard-all
983 Delete all local symbols.
984
985 @kindex -X
986 @kindex --discard-locals
987 @cindex local symbols, deleting
988 @item -X
989 @itemx --discard-locals
990 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
993
994 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
995 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996 @cindex symbol tracing
997 @item -y @var{symbol}
998 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001 to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1007 @item -Y @var{path}
1008 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009 for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012 @item -z @var{keyword}
1013 The recognized keywords are:
1014 @table @samp
1015
1016 @item combreloc
1017 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018 lookup caching possible.
1019
1020 @item defs
1021 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1022 shared libraries are still allowed.
1023
1024 @item execstack
1025 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
1027 @item initfirst
1028 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033 objects.
1034
1035 @item interpose
1036 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037 but the primary executable.
1038
1039 @item lazy
1040 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043 Lazy binding is the default.
1044
1045 @item loadfltr
1046 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047 runtime.
1048
1049 @item muldefs
1050 Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052 @item nocombreloc
1053 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055 @item nocopyreloc
1056 Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058 @item nodefaultlib
1059 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060 ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062 @item nodelete
1063 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065 @item nodlopen
1066 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068 @item nodump
1069 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
1071 @item noexecstack
1072 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074 @item norelro
1075 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
1077 @item now
1078 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082 first called.
1083
1084 @item origin
1085 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
1087 @item relro
1088 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
1090 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
1096 @end table
1097
1098 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1099
1100 @kindex -(
1101 @cindex groups of archives
1102 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1103 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114 resolved.
1115
1116 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118 more archives.
1119
1120 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1125 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1126 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130 restore the old behaviour.
1131
1132 @kindex --as-needed
1133 @kindex --no-as-needed
1134 @item --as-needed
1135 @itemx --no-as-needed
1136 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1137 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1138 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1140 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141 emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142 from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143 DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144 undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1145 @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
1147 @kindex --add-needed
1148 @kindex --no-add-needed
1149 @item --add-needed
1150 @itemx --no-add-needed
1151 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1155
1156 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1158 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160 @kindex -Bdynamic
1161 @kindex -dy
1162 @kindex -call_shared
1163 @item -Bdynamic
1164 @itemx -dy
1165 @itemx -call_shared
1166 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1171 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1172
1173 @kindex -Bgroup
1174 @item -Bgroup
1175 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1178 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1180
1181 @kindex -Bstatic
1182 @kindex -dn
1183 @kindex -non_shared
1184 @kindex -static
1185 @item -Bstatic
1186 @itemx -dn
1187 @itemx -non_shared
1188 @itemx -static
1189 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1193 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1194 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1198 libraries.
1199
1200 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1201 @item -Bsymbolic
1202 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206 platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
1208 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1211 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1212 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213 libraries.
1214
1215 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223 which support shared libraries.
1224
1225 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
1228 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229 @item --dynamic-list-data
1230 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
1237 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
1241 @kindex --check-sections
1242 @kindex --no-check-sections
1243 @item --check-sections
1244 @itemx --no-check-sections
1245 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1246 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1247 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1250 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1251 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253 option.
1254
1255 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1266 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1270 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1271 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1273 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1274 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1275 symbols.
1276
1277 @cindex cross reference table
1278 @kindex --cref
1279 @item --cref
1280 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288 definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
1290 @cindex common allocation
1291 @kindex --no-define-common
1292 @item --no-define-common
1293 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
1308 @cindex symbols, from command line
1309 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1311 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321 @var{expression}.
1322
1323 @cindex demangling, from command line
1324 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1325 @kindex --no-demangle
1326 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1327 @itemx --no-demangle
1328 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1332 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1335 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1337
1338 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1339 @kindex -I@var{file}
1340 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341 @item -I@var{file}
1342 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1343 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346 doing.
1347
1348 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1349 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1350 @item --fatal-warnings
1351 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1354
1355 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356 @item --force-exe-suffix
1357 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366 @kindex --gc-sections
1367 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1368 @cindex garbage collection
1369 @item --gc-sections
1370 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1371 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1372 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1373 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1375
1376 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
1386 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1387 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1388 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
1391 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1392 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393 @cindex garbage collection
1394 @item --print-gc-sections
1395 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401 line.
1402
1403 @kindex --print-output-format
1404 @cindex output format
1405 @item --print-output-format
1406 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1407 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1408 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1409
1410 @cindex help
1411 @cindex usage
1412 @kindex --help
1413 @item --help
1414 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1415
1416 @kindex --target-help
1417 @item --target-help
1418 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1419
1420 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1421 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1422 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1423 @option{-M} option, above.
1424
1425 @cindex memory usage
1426 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1427 @item --no-keep-memory
1428 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1429 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1430 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1431 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1432 while linking a large executable.
1433
1434 @kindex --no-undefined
1435 @kindex -z defs
1436 @item --no-undefined
1437 @itemx -z defs
1438 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1439 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1440 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1441 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1442 libraries being linked in.
1443
1444 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1445 @kindex -z muldefs
1446 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1447 @itemx -z muldefs
1448 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1449 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1450 first definition will be used.
1451
1452 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1453 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1454 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1455 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1456 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1457 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1458 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1459 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1460 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1461
1462 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1463 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1464 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1465 a shared library.
1466
1467 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1468 libraries specified at link time are that:
1469
1470 @itemize @bullet
1471 @item
1472 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1473 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1474 resolvable at load time.
1475 @item
1476 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1477 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1478
1479 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1480 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1481 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1482 appropriate memset function.
1483 @end itemize
1484
1485 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1486 @item --no-undefined-version
1487 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1488 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1489 will be issued instead.
1490
1491 @kindex --default-symver
1492 @item --default-symver
1493 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1494 exported symbols.
1495
1496 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1497 @item --default-imported-symver
1498 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1499 imported symbols.
1500
1501 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1502 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1503 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1504 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1505 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1506 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1507 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1508 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1509 inappropriate.
1510
1511 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1512 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1513 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1514 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1515
1516 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1517 @item --no-whole-archive
1518 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1519 archive files.
1520
1521 @cindex output file after errors
1522 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1523 @item --noinhibit-exec
1524 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1525 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1526 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1527 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1528
1529 @kindex -nostdlib
1530 @item -nostdlib
1531 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1532 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1533 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1534
1535 @ifclear SingleFormat
1536 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1537 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1538 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1539 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1540 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1541 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1542 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1543 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1544 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1545 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1546 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1547 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1548 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1549 @end ifclear
1550
1551 @kindex -pie
1552 @kindex --pic-executable
1553 @item -pie
1554 @itemx --pic-executable
1555 @cindex position independent executables
1556 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1557 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1558 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1559 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1560 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1561 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1562
1563 @kindex -qmagic
1564 @item -qmagic
1565 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1566
1567 @kindex -Qy
1568 @item -Qy
1569 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1570
1571 @kindex --relax
1572 @cindex synthesizing linker
1573 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1574 @cindex --no-relax
1575 @item --relax
1576 @itemx --no-relax
1577 An option with machine dependent effects.
1578 @ifset GENERIC
1579 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1580 @end ifset
1581 @ifset H8300
1582 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1583 @end ifset
1584 @ifset I960
1585 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1586 @end ifset
1587 @ifset XTENSA
1588 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1589 @end ifset
1590 @ifset M68HC11
1591 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1592 @end ifset
1593 @ifset POWERPC
1594 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1595 @end ifset
1596
1597 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1598 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1599 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1600 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1601 instructions, and combinig constant values.
1602
1603 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1604 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1605 @ifset GENERIC
1606 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1607 family of processors.
1608 @end ifset
1609
1610 @ifset GENERIC
1611 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1612 but ignored.
1613 @end ifset
1614
1615 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1616 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1617
1618 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1619 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1620 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1621 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1622 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1623 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1624 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1625 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1626 @ifset GENERIC
1627 (such as VxWorks)
1628 @end ifset
1629 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1630 run-time memory.
1631
1632 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1633 or symbols needed for relocations.
1634
1635 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1636 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1637
1638 @ifset GENERIC
1639 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1640 @cindex runtime library search path
1641 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1642 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1643 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1644 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1645 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1646 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1647 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1648 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1649 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1650 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1651
1652 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1653 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1654 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1655 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1656 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1657 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1658 file systems.
1659
1660 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1661 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1662 the @option{-rpath} option.
1663 @end ifset
1664
1665 @ifset GENERIC
1666 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1667 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1668 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1669 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1670 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1671 of the input files.
1672
1673 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1674 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1675 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1676 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1677 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1678 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1679 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1680 appearing multiple times.
1681
1682 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1683 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1684 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1685 runtime linker would do.
1686
1687 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1688 libraries:
1689 @enumerate
1690 @item
1691 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1692 @item
1693 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1694 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1695 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1696 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1697 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1698 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1699 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1700 @item
1701 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1702 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1703 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1704 @item
1705 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1706 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1707 @item
1708 For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1709 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1710 @item
1711 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1712 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1713 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1714 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1715 @item
1716 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1717 @item
1718 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1719 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1720 @end enumerate
1721
1722 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1723 warning and continue with the link.
1724 @end ifset
1725
1726 @kindex -shared
1727 @kindex -Bshareable
1728 @item -shared
1729 @itemx -Bshareable
1730 @cindex shared libraries
1731 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1732 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1733 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1734 undefined symbols in the link.
1735
1736 @kindex --sort-common
1737 @item --sort-common
1738 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1739 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1740 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1741 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1742 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1743 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1744 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1745 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1746
1747 @kindex --sort-section=name
1748 @item --sort-section=name
1749 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1750 patterns in the linker script.
1751
1752 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1753 @item --sort-section=alignment
1754 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1755 patterns in the linker script.
1756
1757 @kindex --split-by-file
1758 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1759 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1760 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1761 size of 1 if not given.
1762
1763 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1764 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1765 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1766 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1767 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1768 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1769 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1770 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1771 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1772 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1773 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1774 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1775
1776 @kindex --stats
1777 @item --stats
1778 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1779 as execution time and memory usage.
1780
1781 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1782 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1783 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1784 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1785 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1786
1787 @kindex --traditional-format
1788 @cindex traditional format
1789 @item --traditional-format
1790 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1791 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1792 use the traditional format instead.
1793
1794 @cindex dbx
1795 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1796 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1797 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1798 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1799 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1800 combine duplicate entries.
1801
1802 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1803 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1804 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1805 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1806 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1807 line.
1808 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1809 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1810 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1811 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1812 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1813
1814 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1815 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1816 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1817 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1818 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1819 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1820 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1821 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1822 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1823
1824 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1825 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1826 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1827 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1828 of the first byte of the text segment.
1829
1830 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1831 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1832 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1833 values for @samp{method}:
1834
1835 @table @samp
1836 @item ignore-all
1837 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1838
1839 @item report-all
1840 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1841
1842 @item ignore-in-object-files
1843 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1844 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1845
1846 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1847 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1848 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1849 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1850 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1851 command line.
1852 @end table
1853
1854 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1855 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1856
1857 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1858 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1859 can change this to a warning.
1860
1861 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1862 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1863 @item --dll-verbose
1864 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1865 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1866 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1867 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1868 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1869
1870 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1871 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1872 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1873 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1874 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1875 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1876 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1877 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1878 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1879 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1880 @xref{WIN32}.
1881
1882 @kindex --warn-common
1883 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1884 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1885 @item --warn-common
1886 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1887 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
1888 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1889 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1890 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
1891 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1892
1893 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1894
1895 @table @samp
1896 @item int i = 1;
1897 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1898 file.
1899
1900 @item extern int i;
1901 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1902 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1903 variable somewhere.
1904
1905 @item int i;
1906 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1907 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1908 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1909 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1910 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1911 a definition of the same variable.
1912 @end table
1913
1914 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1915 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1916 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1917 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1918 a common symbol.
1919
1920 @enumerate
1921 @item
1922 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1923 definition for the symbol.
1924 @smallexample
1925 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1926 overridden by definition
1927 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1928 @end smallexample
1929
1930 @item
1931 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1932 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1933 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1934 @smallexample
1935 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1936 overriding common
1937 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1938 @end smallexample
1939
1940 @item
1941 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1942 @smallexample
1943 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1944 of `@var{symbol}'
1945 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1946 @end smallexample
1947
1948 @item
1949 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1950 @smallexample
1951 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1952 overridden by larger common
1953 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1954 @end smallexample
1955
1956 @item
1957 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1958 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1959 encountered in a different order.
1960 @smallexample
1961 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1962 overriding smaller common
1963 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1964 @end smallexample
1965 @end enumerate
1966
1967 @kindex --warn-constructors
1968 @item --warn-constructors
1969 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1970 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1971 detect the use of global constructors.
1972
1973 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1974 @item --warn-multiple-gp
1975 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1976 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1977 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1978 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1979 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1980 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1981 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1982 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1983 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1984 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1985 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1986
1987 @kindex --warn-once
1988 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1989 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1990 @item --warn-once
1991 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1992 which refers to it.
1993
1994 @kindex --warn-section-align
1995 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
1996 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
1997 @item --warn-section-align
1998 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1999 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2000 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2001 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2002 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2003
2004 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2005 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2006 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2007
2008 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2009 @item --warn-alternate-em
2010 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2011
2012 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2013 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2014 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2015 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2016 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2017
2018 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2019 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2020 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2021 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2022
2023 @kindex --whole-archive
2024 @cindex including an entire archive
2025 @item --whole-archive
2026 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2027 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2028 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2029 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2030 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2031 library. This option may be used more than once.
2032
2033 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2034 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2035 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2036 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2037 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2038
2039 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2040 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2041 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2042 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2043 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2044 @var{symbol}.
2045
2046 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2047 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2048 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2049 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2050
2051 Here is a trivial example:
2052
2053 @smallexample
2054 void *
2055 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2056 @{
2057 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2058 return __real_malloc (c);
2059 @}
2060 @end smallexample
2061
2062 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2063 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2064 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2065 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2066
2067 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2068 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2069 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2070 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2071 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2072
2073 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2074 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2075 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2076 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2077
2078 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2079 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2080 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2081 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2082 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2083
2084 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2085 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2086 @item --enable-new-dtags
2087 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2088 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2089 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2090 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2091 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2092 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2093 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2094
2095 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2096 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2097 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2098 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2099 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2100 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2101 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2102
2103 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2104 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2105 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2106 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2107 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2108 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2109 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2110
2111 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2112 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2113 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2114 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2115 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2116 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2117
2118 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2119 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2120 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2121 has been used.
2122
2123 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2124 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2125
2126 @kindex --build-id
2127 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2128 @item --build-id
2129 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2130 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2131 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2132 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2133 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2134 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2135 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2136 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2137 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2138 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2139 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2140
2141 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2142 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2143 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2144 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2145 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2146 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2147
2148 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2149 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2150 @end table
2151
2152 @c man end
2153
2154 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2155
2156 @c man begin OPTIONS
2157
2158 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2159 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2160 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2161 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2162 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2163 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2164 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2165 object file).
2166
2167 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2168 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2169 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2170 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2171
2172 @table @gcctabopt
2173
2174 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2175 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2176 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2177 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2178 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2179
2180 @kindex --base-file
2181 @item --base-file @var{file}
2182 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2183 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2184 @file{dlltool}.
2185 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2186
2187 @kindex --dll
2188 @item --dll
2189 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2190 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2191 file.
2192 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2193
2194 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2195 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2196 @item --enable-long-section-names
2197 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2198 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2199 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2200 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2201 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2202 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2203 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2204 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2205 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2206 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2207 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2208 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2209 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2210 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2211 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2212 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2213 image and not stripping symbols.
2214 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2215
2216 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2217 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2218 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2219 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2220 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2221 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2222 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2223 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2224 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2225 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2226 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2227 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2228 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2229 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2230 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2231 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2232 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2233 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2234
2235 @kindex --leading-underscore
2236 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2237 @item --leading-underscore
2238 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2239 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2240 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2241 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2242
2243 @cindex DLLs, creating
2244 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2245 @item --export-all-symbols
2246 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2247 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2248 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2249 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2250 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2251 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2252 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2253 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2254 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2255 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2256 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2257 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2258 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2259 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2260 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2261 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2262 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2263 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2264 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2265 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2266 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2267 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2268 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2269
2270 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2271 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2272 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2273 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2274 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2275
2276 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2277 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2278 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2279 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2280
2281 @kindex --file-alignment
2282 @item --file-alignment
2283 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2284 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2285 512.
2286 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2287
2288 @cindex heap size
2289 @kindex --heap
2290 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2291 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2292 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2293 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2294 committed.
2295 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2296
2297 @cindex image base
2298 @kindex --image-base
2299 @item --image-base @var{value}
2300 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2301 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2302 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2303 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2304 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2305 for dlls.
2306 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2307
2308 @kindex --kill-at
2309 @item --kill-at
2310 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2311 symbols before they are exported.
2312 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2313
2314 @kindex --large-address-aware
2315 @item --large-address-aware
2316 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2317 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2318 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2319 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2320 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2321 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2322
2323 @kindex --major-image-version
2324 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2325 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2326 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2327
2328 @kindex --major-os-version
2329 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2330 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2331 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2332
2333 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2334 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2335 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2336 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2337
2338 @kindex --minor-image-version
2339 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2340 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2341 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2342
2343 @kindex --minor-os-version
2344 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2345 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2346 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2347
2348 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2349 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2350 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2351 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2352
2353 @cindex DEF files, creating
2354 @cindex DLLs, creating
2355 @kindex --output-def
2356 @item --output-def @var{file}
2357 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2358 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2359 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2360 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2361 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2362 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2363
2364 @cindex DLLs, creating
2365 @kindex --out-implib
2366 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2367 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2368 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2369 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2370 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2371 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2372 creation step.
2373 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2374
2375 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2376 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2377 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2378 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2379 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2380 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2381 avoided.
2382 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2383
2384 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2385 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2386 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2387 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2388 default.
2389 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2390
2391 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2392 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2393 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2394 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2395 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2396 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2397 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2398 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2399 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2400 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2401
2402 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2403 @item --enable-auto-import
2404 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2405 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2406 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2407 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2408 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2409 specification published by Microsoft.
2410
2411 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2412 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2413 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2414 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2415 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2416
2417 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2418 see this message:
2419
2420 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2421 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2422
2423 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2424 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2425 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2426 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2427 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2428 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2429 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2430 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2431 the warning, and exit.
2432
2433 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2434 data type of the exported variable:
2435
2436 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2437 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2438 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2439
2440 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2441 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2442 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2443 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2444
2445 @example
2446 extern type extern_array[];
2447 extern_array[1] -->
2448 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2449 @end example
2450
2451 or
2452
2453 @example
2454 extern type extern_array[];
2455 extern_array[1] -->
2456 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2457 @end example
2458
2459 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2460 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2461
2462 @example
2463 extern struct s extern_struct;
2464 extern_struct.field -->
2465 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2466 @end example
2467
2468 or
2469
2470 @example
2471 extern long long extern_ll;
2472 extern_ll -->
2473 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2474 @end example
2475
2476 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2477 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2478 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
2479 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2480 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2481 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2482 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2483 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2484
2485 Original:
2486 @example
2487 --foo.h
2488 extern int arr[];
2489 --foo.c
2490 #include "foo.h"
2491 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2492 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2493 @}
2494 @end example
2495
2496 Solution 1:
2497 @example
2498 --foo.h
2499 extern int arr[];
2500 --foo.c
2501 #include "foo.h"
2502 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2503 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2504 volatile int *parr = arr;
2505 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2506 @}
2507 @end example
2508
2509 Solution 2:
2510 @example
2511 --foo.h
2512 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2513 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2514 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2515 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2516 #else
2517 #define FOO_IMPORT
2518 #endif
2519 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2520 --foo.c
2521 #include "foo.h"
2522 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2523 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2524 @}
2525 @end example
2526
2527 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2528 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2529 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2530 functions).
2531 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2532
2533 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2534 @item --disable-auto-import
2535 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2536 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2537 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2538
2539 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2540 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2541 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2542 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2543 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2544 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2545 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2546
2547 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2548 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2549 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2550 DLLs. This is the default.
2551 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2552
2553 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2554 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2555 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2556 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2557
2558 @kindex --section-alignment
2559 @item --section-alignment
2560 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2561 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2562 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2563
2564 @cindex stack size
2565 @kindex --stack
2566 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2567 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2568 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2569 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2570 committed.
2571 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2572
2573 @kindex --subsystem
2574 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2575 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2576 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2577 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2578 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2579 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2580 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2581 @var{which}.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2585 of the PE file header:
2586 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2587
2588 @kindex --dynamicbase
2589 @item --dynamicbase
2590 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2591 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2592 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2593
2594 @kindex --forceinteg
2595 @item --forceinteg
2596 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2597
2598 @kindex --nxcompat
2599 @item --nxcompat
2600 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2601 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2602
2603 @kindex --no-isolation
2604 @item --no-isolation
2605 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2606
2607 @kindex --no-seh
2608 @item --no-seh
2609 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2610 this image.
2611
2612 @kindex --no-bind
2613 @item --no-bind
2614 Do not bind this image.
2615
2616 @kindex --wdmdriver
2617 @item --wdmdriver
2618 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2619
2620 @kindex --tsaware
2621 @item --tsaware
2622 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2623
2624 @end table
2625
2626 @c man end
2627
2628 @ifset C6X
2629 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2630
2631 @c man begin OPTIONS
2632
2633 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2634 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2635 all executables use an index of 0.
2636
2637 @table @gcctabopt
2638
2639 @kindex --dsbt-size
2640 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2641 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2642 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2643 entries.
2644
2645 @kindex --dsbt-index
2646 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2647 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2648 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2649 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2650 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2651
2652 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2653 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2654 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2655
2656 @end table
2657
2658 @c man end
2659 @end ifset
2660
2661 @ifset M68HC11
2662 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2663
2664 @c man begin OPTIONS
2665
2666 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2667 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2668
2669 @table @gcctabopt
2670
2671 @kindex --no-trampoline
2672 @item --no-trampoline
2673 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2674 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2675 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2676
2677 @kindex --bank-window
2678 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2679 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2680 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2681 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2682 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2683
2684 @end table
2685
2686 @c man end
2687 @end ifset
2688
2689 @ifset M68K
2690 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2691
2692 @c man begin OPTIONS
2693
2694 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2695 when linking for 68K targets.
2696
2697 @table @gcctabopt
2698
2699 @kindex --got
2700 @item --got=@var{type}
2701 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2702 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2703 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2704 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2705
2706 @end table
2707
2708 @c man end
2709 @end ifset
2710
2711 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2712 @node Environment
2713 @section Environment Variables
2714
2715 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2716
2717 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2718 @ifclear SingleFormat
2719 @code{GNUTARGET},
2720 @end ifclear
2721 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2722
2723 @ifclear SingleFormat
2724 @kindex GNUTARGET
2725 @cindex default input format
2726 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2727 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2728 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2729 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2730 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2731 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2732 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2733 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2734 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2735 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2736 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2737 @end ifclear
2738
2739 @kindex LDEMULATION
2740 @cindex default emulation
2741 @cindex emulation, default
2742 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2743 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2744 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2745 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2746 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2747 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2748 linker was configured.
2749
2750 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2751 @cindex demangling, default
2752 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2753 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2754 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2755 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2756 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2757 options.
2758
2759 @c man end
2760 @end ifset
2761
2762 @node Scripts
2763 @chapter Linker Scripts
2764
2765 @cindex scripts
2766 @cindex linker scripts
2767 @cindex command files
2768 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2769 written in the linker command language.
2770
2771 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2772 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2773 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2774 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2775 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2776 described below.
2777
2778 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2779 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2780 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2781 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2782 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2783
2784 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2785 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2786 default linker script.
2787
2788 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2789 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2790 Linker Scripts}.
2791
2792 @menu
2793 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2794 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2795 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2796 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2797 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2798 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2799 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2800 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2801 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2802 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2803 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2804 @end menu
2805
2806 @node Basic Script Concepts
2807 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2808 @cindex linker script concepts
2809 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2810 describe the linker script language.
2811
2812 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2813 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2814 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2815 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2816 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2817 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2818 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2819 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2820
2821 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2822 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2823 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2824 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2825 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2826 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2827 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2828 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2829 of debugging information.
2830
2831 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2832 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2833 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2834 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2835 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2836 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2837 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2838 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2839 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2840 RAM address would be the VMA.
2841
2842 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2843 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2844
2845 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2846 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2847 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2848 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2849 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2850 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2851 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2852
2853 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2854 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2855 option.
2856
2857 @node Script Format
2858 @section Linker Script Format
2859 @cindex linker script format
2860 Linker scripts are text files.
2861
2862 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2863 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2864 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2865 generally ignored.
2866
2867 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2868 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2869 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2870 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2871 file name.
2872
2873 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2874 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2875 to whitespace.
2876
2877 @node Simple Example
2878 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2879 @cindex linker script example
2880 @cindex example of linker script
2881 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2882
2883 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2884 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2885 memory layout of the output file.
2886
2887 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2888 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2889 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2890 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2891 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2892 your input files.
2893
2894 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2895 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2896 linker script which will do that:
2897 @smallexample
2898 SECTIONS
2899 @{
2900 . = 0x10000;
2901 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2902 . = 0x8000000;
2903 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2904 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2905 @}
2906 @end smallexample
2907
2908 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2909 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2910 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2911
2912 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2913 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2914 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2915 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2916 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2917 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2918 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2919
2920 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2921 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2922 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2923 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2924 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2925 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2926
2927 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2928 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2929 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2930
2931 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2932 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2933 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2934 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2935 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2936 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2937 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2938
2939 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2940 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2941 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2942 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2943 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2944 sections.
2945
2946 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2947
2948 @node Simple Commands
2949 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
2950 @cindex linker script simple commands
2951 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2952
2953 @menu
2954 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2955 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2956 @ifclear SingleFormat
2957 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2958 @end ifclear
2959
2960 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
2961 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2962 @end menu
2963
2964 @node Entry Point
2965 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
2966 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2967 @cindex start of execution
2968 @cindex first instruction
2969 @cindex entry point
2970 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2971 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2972 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2973 @smallexample
2974 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2975 @end smallexample
2976
2977 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2978 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2979 stopping when one of them succeeds:
2980 @itemize @bullet
2981 @item
2982 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
2983 @item
2984 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
2985 @item
2986 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2987 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2988 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
2989 @item
2990 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
2991 @item
2992 The address @code{0}.
2993 @end itemize
2994
2995 @node File Commands
2996 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
2997 @cindex linker script file commands
2998 Several linker script commands deal with files.
2999
3000 @table @code
3001 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3002 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3003 @cindex including a linker script
3004 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3005 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3006 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3007 10 levels deep.
3008
3009 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3010 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3011
3012 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3013 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3014 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3015 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3016 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3017 @cindex linker script input object files
3018 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3019 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3020
3021 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3022 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3023 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3024
3025 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3026 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3027
3028 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3029 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3030 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3031 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3032 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3033 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3034 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3035
3036 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3037 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3038 @samp{-l}.
3039
3040 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3041 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3042 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3043
3044 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3045 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3046 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3047 @cindex grouping input files
3048 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3049 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3050 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3051 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3052
3053 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3054 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3055 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3056 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3057 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3058 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3059 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3060 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3061 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3062 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3063 setting afterwards.
3064
3065 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3066 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3067 @cindex output file name in linker script
3068 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3069 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3070 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3071 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3072 precedence.
3073
3074 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3075 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3076
3077 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3078 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3079 @cindex library search path in linker script
3080 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3081 @cindex search path in linker script
3082 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3083 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3084 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3085 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3086 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3087 the command line option are searched first.
3088
3089 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3090 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3091 @cindex first input file
3092 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3093 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3094 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3095 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3096 first file.
3097 @end table
3098
3099 @ifclear SingleFormat
3100 @node Format Commands
3101 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3102 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3103
3104 @table @code
3105 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3106 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3107 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3108 @cindex output file format in linker script
3109 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3110 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3111 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3112 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3113 line option takes precedence.
3114
3115 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3116 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3117 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3118 desired endianness.
3119
3120 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3121 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3122 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3123 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3124
3125 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3126 command:
3127 @smallexample
3128 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3129 @end smallexample
3130 This says that the default format for the output file is
3131 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3132 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3133 format.
3134
3135 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3136 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3137 @cindex input file format in linker script
3138 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3139 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3140 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3141 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3142 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3143 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3144 @end table
3145 @end ifclear
3146
3147 @node REGION_ALIAS
3148 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3149 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3150 @cindex region alias
3151 @cindex region names
3152
3153 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3154 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3155
3156 @smallexample
3157 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3158 @end smallexample
3159
3160 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3161 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3162 to memory regions. An example follows.
3163
3164 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3165 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3166 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3167 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3168 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3169 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3170 sections:
3171
3172 @itemize @bullet
3173 @item
3174 @code{.text} program code;
3175 @item
3176 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3177 @item
3178 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3179 @item
3180 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3181 @end itemize
3182
3183 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3184 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3185 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3186 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3187 @code{C}:
3188 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3189 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3190 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3191 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3192 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3193 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3194 @end multitable
3195 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3196 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3197 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3198 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3199
3200 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3201 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3202 memory layout:
3203 @smallexample
3204 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3205
3206 SECTIONS
3207 @{
3208 .text :
3209 @{
3210 *(.text)
3211 @} > REGION_TEXT
3212 .rodata :
3213 @{
3214 *(.rodata)
3215 rodata_end = .;
3216 @} > REGION_RODATA
3217 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3218 @{
3219 data_start = .;
3220 *(.data)
3221 @} > REGION_DATA
3222 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3223 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3224 .bss :
3225 @{
3226 *(.bss)
3227 @} > REGION_BSS
3228 @}
3229 @end smallexample
3230
3231 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3232 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3233 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3234 @table @code
3235 @item A
3236 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3237 @smallexample
3238 MEMORY
3239 @{
3240 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3241 @}
3242
3243 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3244 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3245 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3246 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3247 @end smallexample
3248 @item B
3249 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3250 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3251 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3252 @smallexample
3253 MEMORY
3254 @{
3255 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3256 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3257 @}
3258
3259 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3260 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3261 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3262 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3263 @end smallexample
3264 @item C
3265 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3266 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3267 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3268 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3269 @smallexample
3270 MEMORY
3271 @{
3272 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3273 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3274 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3275 @}
3276
3277 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3278 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3279 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3280 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3281 @end smallexample
3282 @end table
3283
3284 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3285 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3286 necessary:
3287 @smallexample
3288 #include <string.h>
3289
3290 extern char data_start [];
3291 extern char data_size [];
3292 extern char data_load_start [];
3293
3294 void copy_data(void)
3295 @{
3296 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3297 @{
3298 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3299 @}
3300 @}
3301 @end smallexample
3302
3303 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3304 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3305 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3306
3307 @table @code
3308 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3309 @kindex ASSERT
3310 @cindex assertion in linker script
3311 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3312 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3313
3314 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3315 @kindex EXTERN
3316 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3317 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3318 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3319 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3320 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3321 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3322
3323 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3324 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3325 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3326 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3327 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3328 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3329
3330 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3331 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3332 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3333 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3334 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3335 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3336
3337 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3338 @kindex INSERT
3339 @cindex insert user script into default script
3340 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3341 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3342 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3343 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3344 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3345 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3346 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3347 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3348 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3349 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3350 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3351 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3352 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3353
3354 @smallexample
3355 SECTIONS
3356 @{
3357 OVERLAY :
3358 @{
3359 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3360 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3361 @}
3362 @}
3363 INSERT AFTER .text;
3364 @end smallexample
3365
3366 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3367 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3368 @cindex cross references
3369 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3370 references among certain output sections.
3371
3372 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3373 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3374 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3375 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3376 a function defined in the other section.
3377
3378 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3379 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3380 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3381 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3382 names.
3383
3384 @ifclear SingleFormat
3385 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3386 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3387 @cindex machine architecture
3388 @cindex architecture
3389 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3390 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3391 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3392 the @samp{-f} option.
3393 @end ifclear
3394
3395 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3396 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3397 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3398 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3399 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3400 @xref{Expression Section}.
3401 @end table
3402
3403 @node Assignments
3404 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3405 @cindex assignment in scripts
3406 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3407 @cindex variables, defining
3408 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3409 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3410
3411 @menu
3412 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3413 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3414 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3415 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3416 @end menu
3417
3418 @node Simple Assignments
3419 @subsection Simple Assignments
3420
3421 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3422
3423 @table @code
3424 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3425 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3426 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3427 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3428 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3429 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3430 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3431 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3432 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3433 @end table
3434
3435 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3436 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3437 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3438
3439 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3440 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3441
3442 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3443
3444 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3445
3446 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3447 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3448 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3449
3450 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3451 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3452
3453 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3454 assignments may be used:
3455
3456 @smallexample
3457 floating_point = 0;
3458 SECTIONS
3459 @{
3460 .text :
3461 @{
3462 *(.text)
3463 _etext = .;
3464 @}
3465 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3466 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3467 @}
3468 @end smallexample
3469 @noindent
3470 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3471 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3472 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3473 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3474 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3475
3476 @node PROVIDE
3477 @subsection PROVIDE
3478 @cindex PROVIDE
3479 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3480 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3481 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3482 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3483 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3484 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3485 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3486 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3487
3488 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3489 @smallexample
3490 SECTIONS
3491 @{
3492 .text :
3493 @{
3494 *(.text)
3495 _etext = .;
3496 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3497 @}
3498 @}
3499 @end smallexample
3500
3501 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3502 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3503 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3504 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3505 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3506 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3507
3508 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3509 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3510 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3511 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3512 hidden and won't be exported.
3513
3514 @node Source Code Reference
3515 @subsection Source Code Reference
3516
3517 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3518 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3519 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3520 symbol that does not have a value.
3521
3522 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3523 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3524 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3525 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3526 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3527 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3528 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3529 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3530
3531 @smallexample
3532 extern int foo;
3533 @end smallexample
3534
3535 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3536
3537 @smallexample
3538 _foo = 1000;
3539 @end smallexample
3540
3541 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3542 transformation has taken place.
3543
3544 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3545 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3546 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3547 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3548 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3549 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3550 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3551
3552 @smallexample
3553 int foo = 1000;
3554 @end smallexample
3555
3556 creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3557 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3558 number 1000 is initially stored.
3559
3560 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3561 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3562 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3563 So:
3564
3565 @smallexample
3566 foo = 1;
3567 @end smallexample
3568
3569 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3570 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3571 address. Whereas:
3572
3573 @smallexample
3574 int * a = & foo;
3575 @end smallexample
3576
3577 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3578 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3579 the variable @samp{a}.
3580
3581 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3582 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3583 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3584
3585 @smallexample
3586 foo = 1000;
3587 @end smallexample
3588
3589 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3590 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3591 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3592 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3593 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3594
3595 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3596 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3597 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3598 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3599 linker script contains these declarations:
3600
3601 @smallexample
3602 @group
3603 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3604 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3605 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3606 @end group
3607 @end smallexample
3608
3609 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3610
3611 @smallexample
3612 @group
3613 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3614
3615 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3616 @end group
3617 @end smallexample
3618
3619 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3620
3621 @node SECTIONS
3622 @section SECTIONS Command
3623 @kindex SECTIONS
3624 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3625 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3626
3627 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3628 @smallexample
3629 SECTIONS
3630 @{
3631 @var{sections-command}
3632 @var{sections-command}
3633 @dots{}
3634 @}
3635 @end smallexample
3636
3637 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3638
3639 @itemize @bullet
3640 @item
3641 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3642 @item
3643 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3644 @item
3645 an output section description
3646 @item
3647 an overlay description
3648 @end itemize
3649
3650 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3651 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3652 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3653 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3654 the layout of the output file.
3655
3656 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3657 below.
3658
3659 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3660 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3661 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3662 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3663 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3664 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3665
3666 @menu
3667 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3668 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3669 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3670 * Input Section:: Input section description
3671 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3672 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3673 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3674 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3675 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3676 @end menu
3677
3678 @node Output Section Description
3679 @subsection Output Section Description
3680 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3681 @smallexample
3682 @group
3683 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3684 [AT(@var{lma})]
3685 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3686 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3687 [@var{constraint}]
3688 @{
3689 @var{output-section-command}
3690 @var{output-section-command}
3691 @dots{}
3692 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3693 @end group
3694 @end smallexample
3695
3696 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3697
3698 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3699 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3700 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3701
3702 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3703
3704 @itemize @bullet
3705 @item
3706 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3707 @item
3708 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3709 @item
3710 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3711 @item
3712 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3713 @end itemize
3714
3715 @node Output Section Name
3716 @subsection Output Section Name
3717 @cindex name, section
3718 @cindex section name
3719 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3720 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3721 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3722 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3723 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3724 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3725 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3726 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3727 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3728 commas must be quoted.
3729
3730 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3731 Discarding}.
3732
3733 @node Output Section Address
3734 @subsection Output Section Address
3735 @cindex address, section
3736 @cindex section address
3737 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3738 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3739 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3740
3741 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3742 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3743 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3744 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3745 contained within the output section.
3746
3747 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3748
3749 @itemize @bullet
3750 @item
3751 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3752 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3753 in that region.
3754
3755 @item
3756 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3757 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3758 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3759 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3760
3761 @item
3762 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3763 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3764 counter.
3765 @end itemize
3766
3767 @noindent
3768 For example:
3769
3770 @smallexample
3771 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3772 @end smallexample
3773
3774 @noindent
3775 and
3776
3777 @smallexample
3778 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3779 @end smallexample
3780
3781 @noindent
3782 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3783 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3784 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3785 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3786 input sections.
3787
3788 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3789 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3790 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3791 do something like this:
3792 @smallexample
3793 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3794 @end smallexample
3795 @noindent
3796 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3797 aligned upward to the specified value.
3798
3799 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3800 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3801 sections are ignored).
3802
3803 @node Input Section
3804 @subsection Input Section Description
3805 @cindex input sections
3806 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3807 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3808
3809 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3810 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3811 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3812 map the input files into your memory layout.
3813
3814 @menu
3815 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3816 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3817 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3818 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3819 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3820 @end menu
3821
3822 @node Input Section Basics
3823 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3824 @cindex input section basics
3825 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3826 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3827
3828 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3829 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3830
3831 The most common input section description is to include all input
3832 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3833 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3834 @smallexample
3835 *(.text)
3836 @end smallexample
3837 @noindent
3838 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3839 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3840 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3841 example:
3842 @smallexample
3843 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3844 @end smallexample
3845 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3846 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3847
3848 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3849 @smallexample
3850 *(.text .rdata)
3851 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3852 @end smallexample
3853 @noindent
3854 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3855 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3856 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3857 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3858 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3859 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3860
3861 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3862 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3863 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3864 @smallexample
3865 data.o(.data)
3866 @end smallexample
3867
3868 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3869 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3870
3871 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3872
3873 @smallexample
3874 @group
3875 SECTIONS @{
3876 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3877 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3878 @}
3879 @end group
3880 @end smallexample
3881
3882 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3883 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3884 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3885 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3886 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3887
3888 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3889 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3890 with no whitespace around the colon.
3891
3892 @table @samp
3893 @item archive:file
3894 matches file within archive
3895 @item archive:
3896 matches the whole archive
3897 @item :file
3898 matches file but not one in an archive
3899 @end table
3900
3901 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3902 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3903 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3904 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3905 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3906 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3907 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3908 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3909 command.
3910
3911 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3912 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3913 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3914 @smallexample
3915 data.o
3916 @end smallexample
3917
3918 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3919 and does not contain any wild card
3920 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3921 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3922 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3923 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3924 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3925 the archive search path.
3926
3927 @node Input Section Wildcards
3928 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3929 @cindex input section wildcards
3930 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
3931 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
3932 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
3933 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3934 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3935
3936 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3937 pattern for the file name.
3938
3939 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3940
3941 @table @samp
3942 @item *
3943 matches any number of characters
3944 @item ?
3945 matches any single character
3946 @item [@var{chars}]
3947 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3948 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3949 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3950 @item \
3951 quotes the following character
3952 @end table
3953
3954 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3955 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3956 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3957 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3958 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3959 a @samp{/} character.
3960
3961 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3962 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3963 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3964
3965 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3966 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3967 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3968 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3969 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3970 @smallexample
3971 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3972 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3973 @end smallexample
3974
3975 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
3976 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3977 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
3978 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3979 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3980 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
3981 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3982
3983 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3984 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3985 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3986 ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3987
3988 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3989 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3990 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3991 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3992 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3993
3994 @cindex SORT
3995 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3996
3997 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3998 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3999
4000 @enumerate
4001 @item
4002 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4003 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4004 sections have the same name.
4005 @item
4006 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4007 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4008 sections have the same alignment.
4009 @item
4010 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4011 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4012 @item
4013 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4014 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4015 @item
4016 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4017 @end enumerate
4018
4019 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4020 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4021 takes precedence over the command line option.
4022
4023 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4024 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4025 treated as nested sorting command.
4026
4027 @enumerate
4028 @item
4029 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4030 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4031 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4032 @item
4033 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4034 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4035 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4036 @end enumerate
4037
4038 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4039 command line option will be ignored.
4040
4041 @cindex SORT_NONE
4042 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4043 section sorting option.
4044
4045 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4046 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4047 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4048
4049 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4050 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4051 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4052 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4053 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4054 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4055 @smallexample
4056 @group
4057 SECTIONS @{
4058 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4059 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4060 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4061 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4062 @}
4063 @end group
4064 @end smallexample
4065
4066 @node Input Section Common
4067 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4068 @cindex common symbol placement
4069 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4070 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4071 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4072 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4073 named @samp{COMMON}.
4074
4075 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4076 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4077 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4078 input files are placed in another section.
4079
4080 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4081 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4082 @smallexample
4083 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4084 @end smallexample
4085
4086 @cindex scommon section
4087 @cindex small common symbols
4088 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4089 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4090 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4091 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4092 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4093 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4094 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4095 locations.
4096
4097 @cindex [COMMON]
4098 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4099 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4100 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4101
4102 @node Input Section Keep
4103 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4104 @cindex KEEP
4105 @cindex garbage collection
4106 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4107 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4108 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4109 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4110 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4111
4112 @node Input Section Example
4113 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4114 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4115 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4116 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4117 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4118 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4119 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4120 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4121 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4122 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4123
4124 @smallexample
4125 @group
4126 SECTIONS @{
4127 outputa 0x10000 :
4128 @{
4129 all.o
4130 foo.o (.input1)
4131 @}
4132 @end group
4133 @group
4134 outputb :
4135 @{
4136 foo.o (.input2)
4137 foo1.o (.input1)
4138 @}
4139 @end group
4140 @group
4141 outputc :
4142 @{
4143 *(.input1)
4144 *(.input2)
4145 @}
4146 @}
4147 @end group
4148 @end smallexample
4149
4150 @node Output Section Data
4151 @subsection Output Section Data
4152 @cindex data
4153 @cindex section data
4154 @cindex output section data
4155 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4156 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4157 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4158 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4159 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4160 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4161 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4162 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4163 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4164 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4165 counter.
4166
4167 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4168 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4169 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4170 stored.
4171
4172 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4173 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4174 @smallexample
4175 BYTE(1)
4176 LONG(addr)
4177 @end smallexample
4178
4179 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4180 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4181 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4182 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4183 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4184
4185 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4186 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4187 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4188 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4189 endianness of the first input object file.
4190
4191 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4192 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4193 @smallexample
4194 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4195 @end smallexample
4196 whereas this will work:
4197 @smallexample
4198 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4199 @end smallexample
4200
4201 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4202 @cindex holes, filling
4203 @cindex unspecified memory
4204 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4205 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4206 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4207 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4208 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4209 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4210 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4211 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4212 different parts of an output section.
4213
4214 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4215 value @samp{0x90}:
4216 @smallexample
4217 FILL(0x90909090)
4218 @end smallexample
4219
4220 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4221 section attribute, but it only affects the
4222 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4223 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4224 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4225 expression.
4226
4227 @node Output Section Keywords
4228 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4229 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4230 commands.
4231
4232 @table @code
4233 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4234 @cindex input filename symbols
4235 @cindex filename symbols
4236 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4237 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4238 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4239 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4240 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4241
4242 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4243 normally used for any other object file format.
4244
4245 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4246 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4247 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4248 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4249 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4250 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4251 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4252 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4253 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4254 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4255 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4256 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4257 ignored for other object file formats.
4258
4259 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4260 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4261 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4262 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4263 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4264 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4265 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4266 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4267 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4268 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4269 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4270 @code{exit}.
4271
4272 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4273 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4274 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4275 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4276 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4277 runtime code expects to see.
4278
4279 @smallexample
4280 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4281 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4282 *(.ctors)
4283 LONG(0)
4284 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4285 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4286 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4287 *(.dtors)
4288 LONG(0)
4289 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4290 @end smallexample
4291
4292 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4293 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4294 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4295 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4296 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4297 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4298 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4299 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4300
4301 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4302 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4303 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4304 scripts.
4305
4306 @end table
4307
4308 @node Output Section Discarding
4309 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4310 @cindex discarding sections
4311 @cindex sections, discarding
4312 @cindex removing sections
4313 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4314 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4315 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4316 @smallexample
4317 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4318 @end smallexample
4319 @noindent
4320 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4321 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4322 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4323 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4324
4325 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4326 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4327 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4328 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4329 section is discarded.
4330
4331 @cindex /DISCARD/
4332 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4333 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4334 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4335
4336 @node Output Section Attributes
4337 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4338 @cindex output section attributes
4339 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4340 like this:
4341
4342 @smallexample
4343 @group
4344 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4345 [AT(@var{lma})]
4346 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4347 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4348 [@var{constraint}]
4349 @{
4350 @var{output-section-command}
4351 @var{output-section-command}
4352 @dots{}
4353 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4354 @end group
4355 @end smallexample
4356
4357 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4358 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4359 remaining section attributes.
4360
4361 @menu
4362 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4363 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4364 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4365 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4366 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4367 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4368 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4369 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4370 @end menu
4371
4372 @node Output Section Type
4373 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4374 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4375 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4376
4377 @table @code
4378 @item NOLOAD
4379 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4380 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4381 @item DSECT
4382 @itemx COPY
4383 @itemx INFO
4384 @itemx OVERLAY
4385 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4386 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4387 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4388 section when the program is run.
4389 @end table
4390
4391 @kindex NOLOAD
4392 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4393 @cindex loading, preventing
4394 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4395 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4396 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4397 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4398 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4399 @smallexample
4400 @group
4401 SECTIONS @{
4402 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4403 @dots{}
4404 @}
4405 @end group
4406 @end smallexample
4407
4408 @node Output Section LMA
4409 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4410 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4411 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4412 @cindex load address
4413 @cindex section load address
4414 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4415 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4416 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4417 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4418 address is optional.
4419
4420 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4421 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4422 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4423 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4424 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4425
4426 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4427 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4428 load address:
4429
4430 @itemize @bullet
4431 @item
4432 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4433 the LMA address as well.
4434
4435 @item
4436 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4437
4438 @item
4439 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4440 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4441 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4442 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4443 the last section in the located region.
4444
4445 @item
4446 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4447 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4448
4449 @item
4450 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4451 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4452 @end itemize
4453
4454 @cindex ROM initialized data
4455 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4456 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4457 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4458 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4459 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4460 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4461 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4462 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4463 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4464
4465 @smallexample
4466 @group
4467 SECTIONS
4468 @{
4469 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4470 .mdata 0x2000 :
4471 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4472 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4473 .bss 0x3000 :
4474 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4475 @}
4476 @end group
4477 @end smallexample
4478
4479 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4480 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4481 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4482 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4483 script.
4484
4485 @smallexample
4486 @group
4487 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4488 char *src = &_etext;
4489 char *dst = &_data;
4490
4491 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4492 while (dst < &_edata)
4493 *dst++ = *src++;
4494
4495 /* Zero bss. */
4496 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4497 *dst = 0;
4498 @end group
4499 @end smallexample
4500
4501 @node Forced Output Alignment
4502 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4503 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4504 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4505 @cindex output section alignment
4506 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4507
4508 @node Forced Input Alignment
4509 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4510 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4511 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4512 @cindex input section alignment
4513 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4514 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4515 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4516
4517 @node Output Section Constraint
4518 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4519 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4520 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4521 @cindex constraints on output sections
4522 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4523 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4524 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4525 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4526
4527 @node Output Section Region
4528 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4529 @kindex >@var{region}
4530 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4531 @cindex memory regions and sections
4532 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4533 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4534
4535 Here is a simple example:
4536 @smallexample
4537 @group
4538 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4539 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4540 @end group
4541 @end smallexample
4542
4543 @node Output Section Phdr
4544 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4545 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4546 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4547 @cindex program headers and sections
4548 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4549 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4550 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4551 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4552 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4553 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4554
4555 Here is a simple example:
4556 @smallexample
4557 @group
4558 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4559 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4560 @end group
4561 @end smallexample
4562
4563 @node Output Section Fill
4564 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4565 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4566 @cindex section fill pattern
4567 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4568 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4569 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4570 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4571 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4572 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4573 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4574 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4575 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4576 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4577 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4578 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4579 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4580
4581 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4582 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4583
4584 Here is a simple example:
4585 @smallexample
4586 @group
4587 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4588 @end group
4589 @end smallexample
4590
4591 @node Overlay Description
4592 @subsection Overlay Description
4593 @kindex OVERLAY
4594 @cindex overlays
4595 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4596 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4597 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4598 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4599 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4600 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4601 than another.
4602
4603 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4604 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4605 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4606 command is as follows:
4607 @smallexample
4608 @group
4609 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4610 @{
4611 @var{secname1}
4612 @{
4613 @var{output-section-command}
4614 @var{output-section-command}
4615 @dots{}
4616 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4617 @var{secname2}
4618 @{
4619 @var{output-section-command}
4620 @var{output-section-command}
4621 @dots{}
4622 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4623 @dots{}
4624 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4625 @end group
4626 @end smallexample
4627
4628 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4629 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4630 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4631 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4632 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4633 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4634
4635 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4636 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4637 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4638 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4639 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4640 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4641
4642 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4643 among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4644 all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4645 section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4646 NOCROSSREFS}.
4647
4648 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4649 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4650 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4651 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4652 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4653 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4654 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4655
4656 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4657 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4658
4659 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4660 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4661 @smallexample
4662 @group
4663 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4664 @{
4665 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4666 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4667 @}
4668 @end group
4669 @end smallexample
4670 @noindent
4671 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4672 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4673 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4674 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4675 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4676 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4677
4678 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4679 like the following.
4680
4681 @smallexample
4682 @group
4683 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4684 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4685 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4686 @end group
4687 @end smallexample
4688
4689 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4690 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4691 example could have been written identically as follows.
4692
4693 @smallexample
4694 @group
4695 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4696 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4697 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4698 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4699 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4700 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4701 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4702 @end group
4703 @end smallexample
4704
4705 @node MEMORY
4706 @section MEMORY Command
4707 @kindex MEMORY
4708 @cindex memory regions
4709 @cindex regions of memory
4710 @cindex allocating memory
4711 @cindex discontinuous memory
4712 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4713 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4714
4715 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4716 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4717 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4718 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4719 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4720 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4721 around to fit into the available regions.
4722
4723 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4724 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4725 you wish. The syntax is:
4726 @smallexample
4727 @group
4728 MEMORY
4729 @{
4730 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4731 @dots{}
4732 @}
4733 @end group
4734 @end smallexample
4735
4736 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4737 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4738 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4739 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4740 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4741 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4742 command.
4743
4744 @cindex memory region attributes
4745 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4746 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4747 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4748 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4749 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4750 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4751 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4752
4753 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4754 @table @samp
4755 @item R
4756 Read-only section
4757 @item W
4758 Read/write section
4759 @item X
4760 Executable section
4761 @item A
4762 Allocatable section
4763 @item I
4764 Initialized section
4765 @item L
4766 Same as @samp{I}
4767 @item !
4768 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4769 @end table
4770
4771 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4772 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4773 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4774 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4775 attributes.
4776
4777 @kindex ORIGIN =
4778 @kindex o =
4779 @kindex org =
4780 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4781 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4782 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4783 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4784 @code{ORG}).
4785
4786 @kindex LENGTH =
4787 @kindex len =
4788 @kindex l =
4789 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4790 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4791 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4792 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4793
4794 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4795 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4796 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4797 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4798 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4799 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4800 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4801 region.
4802
4803 @smallexample
4804 @group
4805 MEMORY
4806 @{
4807 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4808 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4809 @}
4810 @end group
4811 @end smallexample
4812
4813 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4814 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4815 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4816 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4817 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4818 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4819 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4820 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4821 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4822
4823 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4824 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4825 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4826
4827 @smallexample
4828 @group
4829 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4830 @end group
4831 @end smallexample
4832
4833 @node PHDRS
4834 @section PHDRS Command
4835 @kindex PHDRS
4836 @cindex program headers
4837 @cindex ELF program headers
4838 @cindex program segments
4839 @cindex segments, ELF
4840 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4841 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4842 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4843 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4844
4845 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4846 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4847 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4848 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4849 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4850
4851 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4852 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4853 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4854 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4855 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4856
4857 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4858 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4859 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4860
4861 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4862 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4863
4864 @smallexample
4865 @group
4866 PHDRS
4867 @{
4868 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4869 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4870 @}
4871 @end group
4872 @end smallexample
4873
4874 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4875 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4876 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4877 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4878 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4879 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4880
4881 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4882 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4883 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4884 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4885 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4886 Section Phdr}.
4887
4888 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4889 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4890 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4891 contain the section.
4892
4893 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4894 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4895 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4896 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4897 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4898 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4899 segment at all.
4900
4901 @kindex FILEHDR
4902 @kindex PHDRS
4903 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
4904 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4905 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4906 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4907 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4908 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4909 these keywords.
4910
4911 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4912 value of the keyword.
4913
4914 @table @asis
4915 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4916 Indicates an unused program header.
4917
4918 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4919 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4920 the file.
4921
4922 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4923 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4924
4925 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4926 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4927 found.
4928
4929 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4930 Indicates a segment holding note information.
4931
4932 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4933 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4934 ABI.
4935
4936 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4937 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4938
4939 @item @var{expression}
4940 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4941 be used for types not defined above.
4942 @end table
4943
4944 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4945 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4946 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4947 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4948 output section attribute.
4949
4950 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4951 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4952 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4953 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4954 header.
4955
4956 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4957 headers used on a native ELF system.
4958
4959 @example
4960 @group
4961 PHDRS
4962 @{
4963 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4964 interp PT_INTERP ;
4965 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4966 data PT_LOAD ;
4967 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4968 @}
4969
4970 SECTIONS
4971 @{
4972 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4973 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4974 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4975 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4976 @dots{}
4977 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4978 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4979 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4980 @dots{}
4981 @}
4982 @end group
4983 @end example
4984
4985 @node VERSION
4986 @section VERSION Command
4987 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4988 @cindex symbol versions
4989 @cindex version script
4990 @cindex versions of symbols
4991 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4992 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4993 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4994 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4995 shared library.
4996
4997 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4998 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4999 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5000
5001 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5002 @smallexample
5003 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5004 @end smallexample
5005
5006 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5007 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5008 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5009 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5010 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5011 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5012 library.
5013
5014 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5015 examples.
5016
5017 @smallexample
5018 VERS_1.1 @{
5019 global:
5020 foo1;
5021 local:
5022 old*;
5023 original*;
5024 new*;
5025 @};
5026
5027 VERS_1.2 @{
5028 foo2;
5029 @} VERS_1.1;
5030
5031 VERS_2.0 @{
5032 bar1; bar2;
5033 extern "C++" @{
5034 ns::*;
5035 "f(int, double)";
5036 @};
5037 @} VERS_1.2;
5038 @end smallexample
5039
5040 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5041 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5042 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5043 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5044 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5045 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5046 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5047 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5048 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5049 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5050
5051 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5052 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5053 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5054
5055 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5056 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5057 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5058
5059 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5060 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5061 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5062 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5063 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5064 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5065 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5066 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5067 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5068
5069 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5070 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5071 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5072 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5073
5074 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5075 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5076 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5077 won't.
5078
5079 @smallexample
5080 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5081 @end smallexample
5082
5083 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5084 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5085 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5086 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5087 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5088 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5089 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5090 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5091 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5092 search for each symbol reference.
5093
5094 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5095 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5096 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5097 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5098 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5099 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5100 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5101 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5102 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5103
5104 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5105 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5106 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5107 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5108 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5109 @smallexample
5110 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5111 @end smallexample
5112 @noindent
5113 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5114 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5115 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5116 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5117 takes precedence over a version script.
5118
5119 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5120 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5121 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5122 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5123 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5124
5125 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5126 source file. Here is an example:
5127
5128 @smallexample
5129 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5130 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5131 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5132 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5133 @end smallexample
5134
5135 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5136 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5137 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5138 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5139
5140 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5141 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5142 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5143 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5144 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5145 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5146
5147 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5148 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5149 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5150 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5151
5152 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5153
5154 @smallexample
5155 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5156 @end smallexample
5157
5158 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5159 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5160 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5161 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5162 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5163
5164 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5165 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5166 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5167 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5168 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5169 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5170 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5171 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5172 expect when you upgrade.
5173
5174 @node Expressions
5175 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5176 @cindex expressions
5177 @cindex arithmetic
5178 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5179 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5180 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5181 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5182
5183 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5184
5185 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5186 expressions.
5187
5188 @menu
5189 * Constants:: Constants
5190 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5191 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5192 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5193 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5194 * Operators:: Operators
5195 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5196 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5197 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5198 @end menu
5199
5200 @node Constants
5201 @subsection Constants
5202 @cindex integer notation
5203 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5204 All constants are integers.
5205
5206 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5207 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5208 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5209 @samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5210 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5211 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5212
5213 @cindex scaled integers
5214 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5215 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5216 @cindex suffixes for integers
5217 @cindex integer suffixes
5218 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5219 constant by
5220 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5221 @ifnottex
5222 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5223 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5224 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5225 @end ifnottex
5226 @tex
5227 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5228 @end tex
5229 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5230 respectively. For example, the following
5231 all refer to the same quantity:
5232
5233 @smallexample
5234 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5235 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5236 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5237 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5238 @end smallexample
5239
5240 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5241 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5242
5243 @node Symbolic Constants
5244 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5245 @cindex symbolic constants
5246 @kindex CONSTANT
5247 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5248 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5249
5250 @table @code
5251 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5252 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5253 The target's maximum page size.
5254
5255 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5256 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5257 The target's default page size.
5258 @end table
5259
5260 So for example:
5261
5262 @smallexample
5263 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5264 @end smallexample
5265
5266 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5267 supported by the target.
5268
5269 @node Symbols
5270 @subsection Symbol Names
5271 @cindex symbol names
5272 @cindex names
5273 @cindex quoted symbol names
5274 @kindex "
5275 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5276 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5277 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5278 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5279 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5280 @smallexample
5281 "SECTION" = 9;
5282 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5283 @end smallexample
5284
5285 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5286 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5287 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5288
5289 @node Orphan Sections
5290 @subsection Orphan Sections
5291 @cindex orphan
5292 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5293 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5294 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5295 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5296 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5297 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5298 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5299 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5300 at the end of the file.
5301
5302 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5303 well as section flag.
5304
5305 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5306 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5307 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5308 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5309 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5310 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5311 character.
5312
5313 @node Location Counter
5314 @subsection The Location Counter
5315 @kindex .
5316 @cindex dot
5317 @cindex location counter
5318 @cindex current output location
5319 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5320 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5321 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5322 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5323 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5324
5325 @cindex holes
5326 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5327 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5328 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5329 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5330 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5331
5332 @smallexample
5333 SECTIONS
5334 @{
5335 output :
5336 @{
5337 file1(.text)
5338 . = . + 1000;
5339 file2(.text)
5340 . += 1000;
5341 file3(.text)
5342 @} = 0x12345678;
5343 @}
5344 @end smallexample
5345 @noindent
5346 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5347 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5348 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5349 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5350 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5351 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5352
5353 @cindex dot inside sections
5354 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5355 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5356 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5357 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5358 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5359 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5360
5361 @smallexample
5362 SECTIONS
5363 @{
5364 . = 0x100
5365 .text: @{
5366 *(.text)
5367 . = 0x200
5368 @}
5369 . = 0x500
5370 .data: @{
5371 *(.data)
5372 . += 0x600
5373 @}
5374 @}
5375 @end smallexample
5376
5377 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5378 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5379 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5380 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5381 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5382 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5383 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5384 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5385
5386 @cindex dot outside sections
5387 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5388 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5389 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5390
5391 @smallexample
5392 SECTIONS
5393 @{
5394 start_of_text = . ;
5395 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5396 end_of_text = . ;
5397
5398 start_of_data = . ;
5399 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5400 end_of_data = . ;
5401 @}
5402 @end smallexample
5403
5404 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5405 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5406 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5407 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5408 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5409 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5410 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5411 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5412 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5413 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5414 as follows:
5415
5416 @smallexample
5417 SECTIONS
5418 @{
5419 start_of_text = . ;
5420 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5421 end_of_text = . ;
5422
5423 start_of_data = . ;
5424 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5425 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5426 end_of_data = . ;
5427 @}
5428 @end smallexample
5429
5430 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5431 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5432 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5433 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5434 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5435 section. So you could write:
5436
5437 @smallexample
5438 SECTIONS
5439 @{
5440 start_of_text = . ;
5441 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5442 end_of_text = . ;
5443
5444 . = . ;
5445 start_of_data = . ;
5446 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5447 end_of_data = . ;
5448 @}
5449 @end smallexample
5450
5451 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5452 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5453
5454 @need 2000
5455 @node Operators
5456 @subsection Operators
5457 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5458 @cindex arithmetic operators
5459 @cindex precedence in expressions
5460 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5461 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5462 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5463 @ifnottex
5464 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5465 @smallexample
5466 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5467 (highest)
5468 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5469 2 left * / %
5470 3 left + -
5471 4 left >> <<
5472 5 left == != > < <= >=
5473 6 left &
5474 7 left |
5475 8 left &&
5476 9 left ||
5477 10 right ? :
5478 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5479 (lowest)
5480 @end smallexample
5481 Notes:
5482 (1) Prefix operators
5483 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5484 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5485 @end ifnottex
5486 @tex
5487 \vskip \baselineskip
5488 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5489 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5490 \hrule
5491 \halign
5492 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5493 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5494 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5495 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5496 \noalign{\hrule}
5497 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5498 &highest&&&&&\cr
5499 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5500 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5501 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5502 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5503 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5504 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5505 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5506 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5507 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5508 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5509 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5510 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5511 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5512 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5513 \hrule}
5514 @end tex
5515 @iftex
5516 {
5517 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5518 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5519 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5520 }
5521 @end iftex
5522 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5523
5524 @node Evaluation
5525 @subsection Evaluation
5526 @cindex lazy evaluation
5527 @cindex expression evaluation order
5528 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5529 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5530
5531 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5532 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5533 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5534 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5535
5536 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5537 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5538 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5539 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5540
5541 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5542 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5543 allocation.
5544
5545 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5546 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5547
5548 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5549 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5550 following
5551 @smallexample
5552 @group
5553 SECTIONS
5554 @{
5555 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5556 @{ *(.text) @}
5557 @}
5558 @end group
5559 @end smallexample
5560 @noindent
5561 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5562 address}.
5563
5564 @node Expression Section
5565 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5566 @cindex expression sections
5567 @cindex absolute expressions
5568 @cindex relative expressions
5569 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5570 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5571 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5572 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5573 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5574 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5575 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5576 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5577 operations.
5578
5579 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5580 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5581 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5582 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5583 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5584 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5585 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5586 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5587 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5588 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5589 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5590 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5591 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5592 everywhere.
5593
5594 In the following simple example,
5595
5596 @smallexample
5597 @group
5598 SECTIONS
5599 @{
5600 . = 0x100;
5601 __executable_start = 0x100;
5602 .data :
5603 @{
5604 . = 0x10;
5605 __data_start = 0x10;
5606 *(.data)
5607 @}
5608 @dots{}
5609 @}
5610 @end group
5611 @end smallexample
5612
5613 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5614 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5615 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5616 section in the second two assignments.
5617
5618 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5619 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5620
5621 @itemize @bullet
5622 @item
5623 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5624 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5625 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5626 @item
5627 Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5628 or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5629 same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5630 address before applying the operator.
5631 @end itemize
5632
5633 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5634
5635 @itemize @bullet
5636 @item
5637 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5638 @item
5639 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5640 @item
5641 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5642 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5643 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5644 @item
5645 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5646 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5647 section as the relative operand(s).
5648 @item
5649 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5650 conversions) is an absolute address.
5651 @end itemize
5652
5653 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5654 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5655 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5656 section @samp{.data}:
5657 @smallexample
5658 SECTIONS
5659 @{
5660 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5661 @}
5662 @end smallexample
5663 @noindent
5664 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5665 @samp{.data} section.
5666
5667 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5668 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5669
5670 @node Builtin Functions
5671 @subsection Builtin Functions
5672 @cindex functions in expressions
5673 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5674 use in linker script expressions.
5675
5676 @table @code
5677 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5678 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5679 @cindex expression, absolute
5680 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5681 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5682 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5683 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5684
5685 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5686 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5687 @cindex section address in expression
5688 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5689 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5690 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5691 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5692 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5693 the other two will be absolute:
5694 @smallexample
5695 @group
5696 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5697 .output1 :
5698 @{
5699 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5700 @dots{}
5701 @}
5702 .output :
5703 @{
5704 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5705 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5706 @}
5707 @dots{} @}
5708 @end group
5709 @end smallexample
5710
5711 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5712 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5713 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5714 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5715 @cindex round up location counter
5716 @cindex align location counter
5717 @cindex round up expression
5718 @cindex align expression
5719 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5720 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5721 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5722 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5723 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5724 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5725
5726 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5727 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5728 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5729 input sections:
5730 @smallexample
5731 @group
5732 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5733 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5734 *(.data)
5735 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5736 @}
5737 @dots{} @}
5738 @end group
5739 @end smallexample
5740 @noindent
5741 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5742 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5743 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5744 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5745
5746 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5747
5748 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5749 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5750 @cindex section alignment
5751 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5752 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5753 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5754 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5755 value in that section.
5756 @smallexample
5757 @group
5758 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5759 .output @{
5760 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5761 @dots{}
5762 @}
5763 @dots{} @}
5764 @end group
5765 @end smallexample
5766
5767 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5768 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5769 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5770 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5771 section.
5772
5773 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5774 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5775 This is equivalent to either
5776 @smallexample
5777 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5778 @end smallexample
5779 or
5780 @smallexample
5781 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5782 @end smallexample
5783 @noindent
5784 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5785 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5786 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5787 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5788 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5789 bytes in the on-disk file.
5790
5791 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5792 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5793 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5794 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5795 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5796
5797 @noindent
5798 Example:
5799 @smallexample
5800 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5801 @end smallexample
5802
5803 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5804 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5805 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5806 evaluation purposes.
5807
5808 @smallexample
5809 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5810 @end smallexample
5811
5812 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5813 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5814 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5815 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5816 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5817 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5818 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5819 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5820 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5821 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5822
5823 @smallexample
5824 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5825 @end smallexample
5826
5827 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5828 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5829 @cindex symbol defaults
5830 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5831 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5832 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5833 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5834 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5835 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5836 existed, its value is preserved:
5837
5838 @smallexample
5839 @group
5840 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5841 .text : @{
5842 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5843 @dots{}
5844 @}
5845 @dots{}
5846 @}
5847 @end group
5848 @end smallexample
5849
5850 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5851 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5852 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5853
5854 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5855 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5856 @cindex section load address in expression
5857 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
5858 Section LMA}).
5859
5860 @kindex MAX
5861 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5862 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5863
5864 @kindex MIN
5865 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5866 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5867
5868 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5869 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5870 @cindex unallocated address, next
5871 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5872 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5873 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5874 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5875
5876 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5877 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5878 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5879
5880 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5881 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5882 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5883 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5884 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5885 @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5886 be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5887 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5888 name.
5889
5890 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5891 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5892 @cindex section size
5893 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5894 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5895 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5896 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5897 @smallexample
5898 @group
5899 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5900 .output @{
5901 .start = . ;
5902 @dots{}
5903 .end = . ;
5904 @}
5905 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5906 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5907 @dots{} @}
5908 @end group
5909 @end smallexample
5910
5911 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5912 @itemx sizeof_headers
5913 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5914 @cindex header size
5915 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5916 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5917 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5918 choose, to facilitate paging.
5919
5920 @cindex not enough room for program headers
5921 @cindex program headers, not enough room
5922 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5923 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5924 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5925 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5926 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5927 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5928 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5929 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5930 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5931 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5932 @end table
5933
5934 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
5935 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
5936 @cindex implicit linker scripts
5937 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5938 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5939 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5940 linker will report an error.
5941
5942 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5943
5944 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5945 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5946 commands.
5947
5948 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5949 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5950 read. This can affect archive searching.
5951
5952 @ifset GENERIC
5953 @node Machine Dependent
5954 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
5955
5956 @cindex machine dependencies
5957 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5958 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
5959 functionality are not listed.
5960
5961 @menu
5962 @ifset H8300
5963 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5964 @end ifset
5965 @ifset I960
5966 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5967 @end ifset
5968 @ifset ARM
5969 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5970 @end ifset
5971 @ifset HPPA
5972 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5973 @end ifset
5974 @ifset M68K
5975 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5976 @end ifset
5977 @ifset MMIX
5978 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
5979 @end ifset
5980 @ifset MSP430
5981 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
5982 @end ifset
5983 @ifset M68HC11
5984 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5985 @end ifset
5986 @ifset POWERPC
5987 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5988 @end ifset
5989 @ifset POWERPC64
5990 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5991 @end ifset
5992 @ifset SPU
5993 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5994 @end ifset
5995 @ifset TICOFF
5996 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
5997 @end ifset
5998 @ifset WIN32
5999 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6000 @end ifset
6001 @ifset XTENSA
6002 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6003 @end ifset
6004 @end menu
6005 @end ifset
6006
6007 @ifset H8300
6008 @ifclear GENERIC
6009 @raisesections
6010 @end ifclear
6011
6012 @node H8/300
6013 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6014
6015 @cindex H8/300 support
6016 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6017 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6018
6019 @table @emph
6020 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6021 @item relaxing address modes
6022 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6023 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6024 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6025 respectively.
6026
6027 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6028 @item synthesizing instructions
6029 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
6030 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6031 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6032 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6033 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6034 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6035 top page of memory).
6036
6037 @item bit manipulation instructions
6038 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6039 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6040 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6041 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6042 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6043 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6044 the top page of memory).
6045
6046 @item system control instructions
6047 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6048 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6049 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6050 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6051 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6052 the top page of memory).
6053 @end table
6054
6055 @ifclear GENERIC
6056 @lowersections
6057 @end ifclear
6058 @end ifset
6059
6060 @ifclear GENERIC
6061 @ifset Renesas
6062 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6063 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6064 @node Renesas
6065 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6066
6067 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6068 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6069 options are required for these chips.
6070 @end ifset
6071 @end ifclear
6072
6073 @ifset I960
6074 @ifclear GENERIC
6075 @raisesections
6076 @end ifclear
6077
6078 @node i960
6079 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6080
6081 @cindex i960 support
6082
6083 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6084 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6085 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6086 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6087 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6088 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6089 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6090
6091 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6092 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6093 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6094 the names
6095
6096 @smallexample
6097 @group
6098 try
6099 libtry.a
6100 tryca
6101 libtryca.a
6102 @end group
6103 @end smallexample
6104
6105 @noindent
6106 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6107 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6108
6109 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6110 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6111 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6112 specifies a library.
6113
6114 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6115 @cindex relaxing on i960
6116 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6117 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6118 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6119 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6120 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6121 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6122 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6123 not itself call any subroutines).
6124
6125 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6126 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6127 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6128 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6129
6130 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6131
6132 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6133 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6134 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6135
6136 @ifclear GENERIC
6137 @lowersections
6138 @end ifclear
6139 @end ifset
6140
6141 @ifset ARM
6142 @ifclear GENERIC
6143 @raisesections
6144 @end ifclear
6145
6146 @ifset M68HC11
6147 @ifclear GENERIC
6148 @raisesections
6149 @end ifclear
6150
6151 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6152 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6153
6154 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6155
6156 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6157
6158 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6159 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6160
6161 @table @emph
6162 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6163 @item relaxing address modes
6164 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6165 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6166 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6167 respectively.
6168
6169 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6170 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6171 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6172
6173 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6174 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6175 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6176 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6177 @code{bset} instructions.
6178
6179 @end table
6180
6181 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6182
6183 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6184 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6185 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6186 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6187 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6188 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6189 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6190 point to the function trampoline.
6191
6192 @ifclear GENERIC
6193 @lowersections
6194 @end ifclear
6195 @end ifset
6196
6197 @node ARM
6198 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6199
6200 @cindex ARM interworking support
6201 @kindex --support-old-code
6202 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6203 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6204 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6205 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6206 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6207 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6208 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6209 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6210 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6211 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6212
6213 @cindex thumb entry point
6214 @cindex entry point, thumb
6215 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6216 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6217 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6218 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6219 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6220 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6221
6222 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6223 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6224 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6225 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6226 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6227 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6228
6229 @cindex BE8
6230 @kindex --be8
6231 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6232 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6233 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6234
6235 @cindex TARGET1
6236 @kindex --target1-rel
6237 @kindex --target1-abs
6238 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6239 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6240 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6241 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6242
6243 @cindex TARGET2
6244 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6245 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6246 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6247 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6248 @table @samp
6249 @item rel
6250 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6251 @item abs
6252 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6253 @item got-rel
6254 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6255 @end table
6256
6257 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6258 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6259 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6260 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6261 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6262 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6263
6264 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6265 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6266 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6267
6268 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6269 relocations are ignored.
6270
6271 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6272 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6273 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6274 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6275
6276 @smallexample
6277 TST rM, #1
6278 MOVEQ PC, rM
6279 BX Rn
6280 @end smallexample
6281
6282 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6283 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6284 condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6285
6286 @cindex USE_BLX
6287 @kindex --use-blx
6288 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6289 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6290 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6291 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6292 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6293
6294 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6295 specify it if you are using that target.
6296
6297 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6298 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6299 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6300 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6301 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6302 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6303 the support code can read the intended values.
6304
6305 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6306 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6307 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6308 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6309 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6310 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6311
6312 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6313 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6314 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6315 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6316 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6317 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6318
6319 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6320 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6321 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6322 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6323 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6324 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6325 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6326
6327 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6328 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6329 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6330 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6331 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6332 are targetting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6333 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6334
6335 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6336 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentaion website at:
6337 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6338
6339 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6340 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6341 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6342 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6343 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6344 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6345 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6346 not be diagnosed.
6347
6348 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6349 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6350 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6351 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6352 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6353 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6354 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6355
6356 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6357 @kindex --pic-veneer
6358 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6359 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6360 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6361 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6362
6363 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6364 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6365 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6366 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6367 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6368 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6369 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6370 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6371 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6372 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6373 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6374 where they should be placed.
6375
6376 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6377 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6378 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6379 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6380 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6381 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6382 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6383 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6384 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6385 from the input sections.
6386
6387 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6388 @samp{N = +1}.
6389
6390 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6391 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6392 otherwise.
6393
6394 @ifclear GENERIC
6395 @lowersections
6396 @end ifclear
6397 @end ifset
6398
6399 @ifset HPPA
6400 @ifclear GENERIC
6401 @raisesections
6402 @end ifclear
6403
6404 @node HPPA ELF32
6405 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6406 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6407 @kindex --multi-subspace
6408 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6409 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6410 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6411 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6412 multiple sub-spaces.
6413
6414 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6415 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6416 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6417 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6418 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6419 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6420 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6421 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6422 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6423 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6424 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6425 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6426 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6427 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6428 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6429 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6430
6431 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6432 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6433 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6434 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6435
6436 @ifclear GENERIC
6437 @lowersections
6438 @end ifclear
6439 @end ifset
6440
6441 @ifset M68K
6442 @ifclear GENERIC
6443 @raisesections
6444 @end ifclear
6445
6446 @node M68K
6447 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6448
6449 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6450 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6451 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6452 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6453 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6454 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6455 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6456 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6457 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6458 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6459 support such GOTs.
6460 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6461 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6462 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6463 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6464
6465 @ifclear GENERIC
6466 @lowersections
6467 @end ifclear
6468 @end ifset
6469
6470 @ifset MMIX
6471 @ifclear GENERIC
6472 @raisesections
6473 @end ifclear
6474
6475 @node MMIX
6476 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6477 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6478 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6479 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6480 can translate between the two formats.
6481
6482 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6483 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6484 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6485 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6486 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6487 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6488 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6489 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6490
6491 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6492 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6493 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6494 of a section.
6495
6496 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6497 are left out from an mmo file.
6498
6499 @ifclear GENERIC
6500 @lowersections
6501 @end ifclear
6502 @end ifset
6503
6504 @ifset MSP430
6505 @ifclear GENERIC
6506 @raisesections
6507 @end ifclear
6508
6509 @node MSP430
6510 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6511 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6512 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6513 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6514
6515 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6516 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6517
6518 @table @code
6519 @item @samp{.vectors}
6520 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6521
6522 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6523 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6524 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6525
6526 @item @samp{.infomem}
6527 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6528 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6529
6530 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6531 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6532 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6533
6534 @item @samp{.noinit}
6535 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6536
6537 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6538 @end table
6539
6540 @ifclear GENERIC
6541 @lowersections
6542 @end ifclear
6543 @end ifset
6544
6545 @ifset POWERPC
6546 @ifclear GENERIC
6547 @raisesections
6548 @end ifclear
6549
6550 @node PowerPC ELF32
6551 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6552 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6553 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6554 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6555 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6556 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6557 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6558 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6559 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6560 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6561 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6562 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6563 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6564
6565 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6566 @table @option
6567 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6568 @kindex --bss-plt
6569 @item --bss-plt
6570 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6571 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6572 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6573 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6574 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6575 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6576 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6577 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6578
6579 @kindex --secure-plt
6580 @item --secure-plt
6581 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6582 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6583 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6584 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6585 style BSS PLT.
6586
6587 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6588 @kindex --sdata-got
6589 @item --sdata-got
6590 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6591 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6592 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6593 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6594 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6595 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6596 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6597 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6598 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6599 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6600 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6601 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6602
6603 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6604 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6605 @item --emit-stub-syms
6606 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6607 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6608
6609 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6610 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6611 @item --no-tls-optimize
6612 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6613 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6614 disable the optimization.
6615 @end table
6616
6617 @ifclear GENERIC
6618 @lowersections
6619 @end ifclear
6620 @end ifset
6621
6622 @ifset POWERPC64
6623 @ifclear GENERIC
6624 @raisesections
6625 @end ifclear
6626
6627 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6628 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6629
6630 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6631 @table @option
6632 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6633 @kindex --stub-group-size
6634 @item --stub-group-size
6635 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6636 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6637 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6638 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6639 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6640 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6641 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6642 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6643 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6644 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6645 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6646 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6647 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6648 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6649
6650 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6651 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6652 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6653 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6654
6655 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6656 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6657 @item --emit-stub-syms
6658 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6659 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6660
6661 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6662 @kindex --dotsyms
6663 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6664 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6665 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6666 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6667 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6668 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6669 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6670 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6671 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6672 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6673 feature.
6674
6675 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6676 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6677 @item --no-tls-optimize
6678 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6679 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6680 disable the optimization.
6681
6682 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6683 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6684 @item --no-opd-optimize
6685 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6686 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6687 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6688 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6689
6690 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6691 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6692 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6693 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6694 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6695 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6696 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6697
6698 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6699 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6700 @item --no-toc-optimize
6701 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6702 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6703 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6704 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6705 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6706 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6707 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6708 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6709 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6710 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6711 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6712 optimization.
6713
6714 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6715 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6716 @item --no-multi-toc
6717 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6718 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6719 where TOC
6720 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6721 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6722 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6723 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6724 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6725 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6726 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6727 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6728
6729 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6730 @kindex --no-toc-sort
6731 @item --no-toc-sort
6732 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6733 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6734 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6735 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6736 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6737 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6738 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6739 off this feature.
6740
6741 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6742 @kindex --plt-align
6743 @kindex --no-plt-align
6744 @item --plt-align
6745 @itemx --no-plt-align
6746 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6747 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6748 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6749 are packed tightly.
6750
6751 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6752 @kindex --plt-static-chain
6753 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6754 @item --plt-static-chain
6755 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6756 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6757 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6758 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6759
6760 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6761 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
6762 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6763 @item --plt-thread-safe
6764 @itemx --no-thread-safe
6765 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6766 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6767 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6768 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6769 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6770 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6771 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6772 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6773 default behaviour.
6774 @end table
6775
6776 @ifclear GENERIC
6777 @lowersections
6778 @end ifclear
6779 @end ifset
6780
6781 @ifset SPU
6782 @ifclear GENERIC
6783 @raisesections
6784 @end ifclear
6785
6786 @node SPU ELF
6787 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6788
6789 @cindex SPU ELF options
6790 @table @option
6791
6792 @cindex SPU plugins
6793 @kindex --plugin
6794 @item --plugin
6795 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6796
6797 @cindex SPU overlays
6798 @kindex --no-overlays
6799 @item --no-overlays
6800 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6801 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6802 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6803 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6804
6805 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6806 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6807 @item --emit-stub-syms
6808 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6809 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6810
6811 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6812 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6813 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6814 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6815 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6816 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6817
6818 @cindex SPU local store size
6819 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6820 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6821 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6822 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6823 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6824
6825 @cindex SPU
6826 @kindex --stack-analysis
6827 @item --stack-analysis
6828 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6829 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6830 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6831 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6832 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6833 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6834 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6835 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6836 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6837 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6838 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6839 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6840 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6841 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6842 and calls will be given.
6843
6844 @cindex SPU
6845 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6846 @item --emit-stack-syms
6847 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6848 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6849 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6850 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6851 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6852 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6853 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6854 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6855 @end table
6856
6857 @ifclear GENERIC
6858 @lowersections
6859 @end ifclear
6860 @end ifset
6861
6862 @ifset TICOFF
6863 @ifclear GENERIC
6864 @raisesections
6865 @end ifclear
6866
6867 @node TI COFF
6868 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6869 @cindex TI COFF versions
6870 @kindex --format=@var{version}
6871 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6872 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6873 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6874 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6875 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6876
6877 @ifclear GENERIC
6878 @lowersections
6879 @end ifclear
6880 @end ifset
6881
6882 @ifset WIN32
6883 @ifclear GENERIC
6884 @raisesections
6885 @end ifclear
6886
6887 @node WIN32
6888 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6889
6890 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6891 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6892 command line options mentioned here.
6893
6894 @table @emph
6895 @cindex import libraries
6896 @item import libraries
6897 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6898 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
6899 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6900 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6901 support for creating such libraries provided with the
6902 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6903
6904 @item exporting DLL symbols
6905 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
6906 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6907
6908 @table @emph
6909 @item using auto-export functionality
6910 @cindex using auto-export functionality
6911 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6912 which is controlled by the following command line options:
6913
6914 @itemize
6915 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6916 @item --exclude-symbols
6917 @item --exclude-libs
6918 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6919 @item --version-script
6920 @end itemize
6921
6922 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6923 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6924 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6925 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6926 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6927 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6928 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6929 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6930
6931 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6932 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6933 if either of the following are true:
6934
6935 @itemize
6936 @item A DEF file is used.
6937 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6938 @end itemize
6939
6940 @item using a DEF file
6941 @cindex using a DEF file
6942 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6943 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6944 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6945 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
6946 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
6947
6948 @example
6949 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6950 @end example
6951
6952 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6953 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6954
6955 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6956
6957 @example
6958 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
6959
6960 EXPORTS
6961 foo
6962 bar
6963 _bar = bar
6964 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6965 var1 DATA
6966 doo = foo == foo2
6967 eoo DATA == var1
6968 @end example
6969
6970 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
6971 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6972 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6973 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6974 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6975 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6976 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6977 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6978 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
6979
6980 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6981 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6982 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6983
6984 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6985 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6986 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
6987 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6988
6989 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6990 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
6991 non-default base address for the image.
6992
6993 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
6994 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6995 filename specified on the command line.
6996
6997 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6998
6999 @example
7000 EXPORTS
7001 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7002 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7003 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7004 @end example
7005
7006 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7007 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7008 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7009 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7010 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7011 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7012 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7013
7014 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7015
7016 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7017 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7018 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7019 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7020 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7021
7022 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7023 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7024 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7025 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7026
7027 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7028 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7029 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7030 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7031 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7032 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7033 application will behave unexpectedly.
7034
7035 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7036 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7037 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7038 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7039 the DLL without an import library.
7040
7041 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7042 other DEF file statements
7043
7044 @cindex creating a DEF file
7045 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7046 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7047
7048 @item Using decorations
7049 @cindex Using decorations
7050 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7051 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7052 declared as:
7053
7054 @example
7055 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7056 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7057 @end example
7058
7059 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7060 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7061 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7062 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7063
7064 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7065 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7066 instead:
7067
7068 @example
7069 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7070 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7071 @end example
7072
7073 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7074 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7075 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7076 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7077 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7078 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7079 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7080 information.
7081 @end table
7082
7083 @cindex automatic data imports
7084 @item automatic data imports
7085 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7086 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7087 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7088 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7089 code to these platforms, especially for large
7090 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7091 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7092 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7093 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7094 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7095 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7096 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7097 trigger the feature's use.
7098
7099 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7100 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7101
7102 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7103 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7104
7105 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7106 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7107 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7108 below.
7109
7110 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7111 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7112 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7113 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7114 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7115 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7116 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7117 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7118 references.
7119
7120 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7121 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7122 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7123 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7124 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7125 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7126 run without error on an older system.
7127
7128 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7129 enabled as needed.
7130
7131 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7132 @item direct linking to a dll
7133 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7134 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7135 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7136 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7137 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7138 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7139 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7140 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7141 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7142 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7143
7144 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7145 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7146 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7147 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7148 select the dll instead of an import library.
7149
7150
7151 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7152 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7153
7154 @example
7155 libxxx.dll.a
7156 xxx.dll.a
7157 libxxx.a
7158 xxx.lib
7159 cygxxx.dll (*)
7160 libxxx.dll
7161 xxx.dll
7162 @end example
7163
7164 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7165
7166 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7167 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7168 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7169 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7170 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7171
7172 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7173 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7174 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7175 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7176 could coexist on the same machine.
7177
7178 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7179 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7180 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7181
7182 @example
7183 bin/
7184 cygxxx.dll
7185 lib/
7186 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7187 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7188 @end example
7189
7190 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7191 done two ways:
7192
7193 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7194 @example
7195 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7196 @end example
7197
7198 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7199 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7200 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7201 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7202
7203 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7204 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7205 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7206 making the app/dll.
7207
7208 @example
7209 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7210 @end example
7211
7212 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7213
7214 @example
7215 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7216 @end example
7217
7218 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7219 perfectly legal
7220
7221 @example
7222 bin/
7223 cygxxx-5.dll
7224 lib/
7225 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7226 @end example
7227
7228 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7229 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7230 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7231
7232 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7233 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7234
7235 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7236 work with auto-imported data.
7237
7238 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7239 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7240 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7241 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7242 possible to do this without an import lib.
7243
7244 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7245 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7246 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7247 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7248
7249 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7250 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7251 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7252 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7253 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7254 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7255 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7256
7257 @item symbol aliasing
7258 @table @emph
7259 @item adding additional names
7260 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7261 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7262 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7263 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7264 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7265
7266 @example
7267 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7268
7269 EXPORTS
7270 foo
7271 _foo = foo
7272 @end example
7273
7274 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7275
7276 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7277 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7278
7279 @example
7280 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7281 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7282 @end example
7283
7284 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7285 symbols.
7286
7287 @item renaming symbols
7288 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7289 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7290 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7291 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7292 created). In the following example:
7293
7294 @example
7295 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7296
7297 EXPORTS
7298 _foo = foo
7299 @end example
7300
7301 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7302 @samp{_foo}.
7303 @end table
7304
7305 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7306 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7307 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7308 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7309 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7310 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7311 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7312 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7313 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7314 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7315 which is probably not what you wanted.
7316
7317 @cindex weak externals
7318 @item weak externals
7319 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7320 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7321 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7322 are three variants of weak externals:
7323 @itemize
7324 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7325 called lazy externals.
7326 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7327 This form is not presently implemented.
7328 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7329 implemented.
7330 @end itemize
7331 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7332 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7333 uses a default value.
7334
7335 @cindex aligned common symbols
7336 @item aligned common symbols
7337 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7338 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7339 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7340 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7341 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7342 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7343 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7344 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7345 @end table
7346
7347 @ifclear GENERIC
7348 @lowersections
7349 @end ifclear
7350 @end ifset
7351
7352 @ifset XTENSA
7353 @ifclear GENERIC
7354 @raisesections
7355 @end ifclear
7356
7357 @node Xtensa
7358 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7359
7360 @cindex Xtensa processors
7361 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7362 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7363 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7364 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7365 example, with the command:
7366
7367 @smallexample
7368 SECTIONS
7369 @{
7370 .text : @{
7371 *(.literal .text)
7372 @}
7373 @}
7374 @end smallexample
7375
7376 @noindent
7377 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7378 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7379 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7380 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7381 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7382 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7383 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7384
7385 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7386 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7387 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7388 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7389 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7390 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7391 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7392 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7393 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7394 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7395 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7396 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7397
7398 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7399 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7400 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7401 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7402 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7403 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7404 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7405 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7406 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7407 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7408 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7409 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7410 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7411 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7412
7413 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7414 control the linker:
7415
7416 @cindex Xtensa options
7417 @table @option
7418 @item --size-opt
7419 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7420 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7421 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7422 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7423 preserve the correctness of the code.
7424 @end table
7425
7426 @ifclear GENERIC
7427 @lowersections
7428 @end ifclear
7429 @end ifset
7430
7431 @ifclear SingleFormat
7432 @node BFD
7433 @chapter BFD
7434
7435 @cindex back end
7436 @cindex object file management
7437 @cindex object formats available
7438 @kindex objdump -i
7439 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7440 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7441 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7442 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7443 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7444 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7445 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7446 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7447 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7448
7449 @cindex BFD requirements
7450 @cindex requirements for BFD
7451 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7452 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7453 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7454 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7455 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7456 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7457 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7458
7459 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7460 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7461 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7462 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7463
7464 @menu
7465 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7466 @end menu
7467
7468 @node BFD outline
7469 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7470 @cindex opening object files
7471 @include bfdsumm.texi
7472 @end ifclear
7473
7474 @node Reporting Bugs
7475 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7476 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7477 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7478
7479 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7480
7481 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7482 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7483 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7484 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7485 @command{ld}.
7486
7487 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7488 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7489
7490 @menu
7491 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7492 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7493 @end menu
7494
7495 @node Bug Criteria
7496 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7497 @cindex bug criteria
7498
7499 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7500
7501 @itemize @bullet
7502 @cindex fatal signal
7503 @cindex linker crash
7504 @cindex crash of linker
7505 @item
7506 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7507 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7508
7509 @cindex error on valid input
7510 @item
7511 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7512
7513 @cindex invalid input
7514 @item
7515 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7516 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7517 object files are correct.
7518
7519 @item
7520 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7521 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7522 @end itemize
7523
7524 @node Bug Reporting
7525 @section How to Report Bugs
7526 @cindex bug reports
7527 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7528
7529 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7530 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7531 recommend you contact that organization first.
7532
7533 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7534 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7535 distribution.
7536
7537 @ifset BUGURL
7538 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7539 @value{BUGURL}.
7540 @end ifset
7541
7542 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7543 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7544 fact or leave it out, state it!
7545
7546 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7547 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7548 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7549 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7550 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7551 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7552 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7553 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7554 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7555 and the most helpful.
7556
7557 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7558 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7559 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7560
7561 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7562 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7563 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7564 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7565
7566 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7567
7568 @itemize @bullet
7569 @item
7570 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7571 the @samp{--version} argument.
7572
7573 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7574 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7575
7576 @item
7577 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7578 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7579
7580 @item
7581 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7582 version number.
7583
7584 @item
7585 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7586 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7587
7588 @item
7589 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7590 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7591 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7592 sufficient.
7593
7594 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7595 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7596
7597 @item
7598 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7599 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7600 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7601 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7602 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7603 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7604 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7605 attachments are best.
7606
7607 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7608 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7609 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7610 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7611 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7612
7613 @item
7614 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7615 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7616
7617 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7618 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7619 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7620 a chance to make a mistake.
7621
7622 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7623 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7624 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7625 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7626 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7627 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7628 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7629 any conclusion from our observations.
7630
7631 @item
7632 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7633 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7634 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7635 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7636 context, not by line number.
7637
7638 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7639 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7640 @end itemize
7641
7642 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7643
7644 @itemize @bullet
7645 @item
7646 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7647
7648 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7649 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7650 changes will not affect it.
7651
7652 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7653 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7654 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7655 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7656
7657 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7658 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7659 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7660 less time, and so on.
7661
7662 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7663 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7664
7665 @item
7666 A patch for the bug.
7667
7668 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7669 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7670 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7671 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7672
7673 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7674 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7675 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7676 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7677 fixed.
7678
7679 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7680 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7681 help us to understand.
7682
7683 @item
7684 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7685
7686 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7687 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7688 @end itemize
7689
7690 @node MRI
7691 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7692 @cindex MRI compatibility
7693 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7694 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7695 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7696 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7697 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7698 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7699 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7700
7701 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7702 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7703 features to make use of them.
7704
7705 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7706 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7707
7708 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7709 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7710 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7711 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7712 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7713
7714 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7715
7716 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7717 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7718 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7719
7720 @table @code
7721 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7722 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7723 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7724 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7725 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7726 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7727 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7728 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7729 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7730 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7731 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7732
7733 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7734 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7735 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7736 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7737
7738 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7739
7740 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7741 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7742 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7743 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7744
7745 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7746 @item BASE @var{expression}
7747 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7748 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7749
7750 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7751 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7752 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7753 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7754
7755 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7756 @item END
7757 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7758
7759 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7760 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7761 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7762 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7763
7764 @enumerate
7765 @item
7766 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7767
7768 @item
7769 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7770
7771 @item
7772 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7773 @samp{COFF}
7774 @end enumerate
7775
7776 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7777 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7778 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7779 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7780
7781 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7782 same line, with no change in its effect.
7783
7784 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7785 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7786 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7787 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7788 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7789 command line.
7790
7791 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7792 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7793 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7794 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7795 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7796
7797 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7798 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7799 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7800 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7801 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7802 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7803 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7804 file, in the order specified.
7805
7806 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7807 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7808 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7809 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7810 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7811 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7812
7813 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7814 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7815 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7816 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7817 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7818 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7819 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7820 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7821 @end table
7822
7823 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7824 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7825 @include fdl.texi
7826
7827 @node LD Index
7828 @unnumbered LD Index
7829
7830 @printindex cp
7831
7832 @tex
7833 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7834 % meantime:
7835 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7836 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7837 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7838 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7839 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7840 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7841 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7842 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7843 \page\colophon
7844 % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7845 @end tex
7846
7847 @bye
This page took 0.267249 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.